WCDMA RAN Planning and Optimization Features and Algorithms - 2

WCDMA UE Behaviors
in Idle Mode
www.huawei.com
Copyright © 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
1
Foreword
z UE behaviors in idle mode include :
PLMN selection
System information reception
Cell selection and reselection
Location registration
Paging procedure
Access procedure
Copyright © 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page1
z PLMN selection
Used to ensure that the PLMN selected by the UE properly provides services.
z Cell selection and reselection
Used to ensure that the UE finds a suitable cell to camp on.
z Location registration
Used for the network to trace the current status of the UE and to ensure that the UE is camped
on the network when the UE does not perform any operation for a long period.
z System information reception
The network broadcasts the network information to a UE which camps on the cell to control the
behaviors of the UE.
z Paging
Used for the network to send paging messages to a UE which is in idle mode, CELL_PCH
state, or URA_PCH state.
z Access
From the view of access stratum, access is the procedure UE shift from idle mode to
connected mode.
2
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
2. System Information Reception
3. Cell Selection and Reselection
4. Location Registration
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
3
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
4
Cell Search
z UE does not have UTRAN carrier information
In order to find a suitable cell to stay, UE will scan all the
frequencies in UTRAN. In each carrier, UE just need to find a
cell with best signal
z UE has UTRAN carrier information

UE will try whether the original cell is suitable to stay. If not, UE
still need to scan all the frequencies about UTRAN in order to
find a suitable cell in PLMN
z Typical scenario of first occasion is the first time a new UE is put into use.
z The second occasion is very common.
5
Cell Search
Slot synchronization
Frame synchronization and

code-group identification
Primary Scrambling code

identification
z Step 1: Slot synchronization

During the first step of the cell search procedure the UE uses the primary synchronisation code
(PSC) to acquire slot synchronisation to a cell.
z Step 2: Frame synchronization and code-group identification
During the second step of the cell search procedure, the UE uses the secondary
synchronisation code (SSC) to find frame synchronisation and identify the code group of the
cell found in the first step.
z Step 3: Primary Scrambling code identification:
During the last step of the cell search procedure, the UE determines the exact primary
scrambling code used by the found cell. The primary scrambling code is typically identified
through symbol-by-symbol correlation over the CPICH with all codes within the code group
identified in the second step.
z If the UE has received information about which scrambling codes to search for, steps 2 and 3
above can be simplified.
6
PLMN Selection
z UE shall maintain a list of allowed PLMN types. In the
PLMN list, the UE arranges available PLMNs by priorities.
When selecting a PLMN, it searches the PLMNs from the
high priority to the low.
z The UE selects a PLMN from HPLMNs or VPLMNs.
z UE can get the system information from PCCPCH, and the PLMN information is transmitted in
MIB of PCCPCH
z After getting the MIB, UE can judge weather the current PLMN is the right one. If so, UE will
get the SIB scheduling information from the MIB; if not, UE will search another carrier, do this
procedure again
7
PLMN Selection (Cont.)
z PLMN Selection in HPLMNs
Automatic PLMN Selection Mode
The UE selects an available and suitable PLMN from the whole
band according to the priority order
Manual PLMN Selection Mode

The order of manual selection is the same as that of automatic
selection.
z The priority order for automatic PLMN selection mode
Order PLMN type Remark
1 HPLMNs Home PLMNs
PLMNs contained in the "User Controlled PLMN

The PLMNs are arranged in
2 Selector with Access Technology" data field in the
priority order
SIM excluding the previously selected PLMN
PLMNs contained in the "Operator Controlled
3 PLMN Selector with Access Technology" data field
priority order
in the SIM excluding the previously selected PLMN
Other PLMN/access technology combinations with
4 the high quality of received signals excluding the
random order
previously selected PLMN
Other PLMN/access technology combinations
5 descending order of signal
excluding the previously selected PLMN
quality.
The PLMN selected by the
6 Previously selected PLMN UE before automatic PLMN
selection
8
PLMN Selection (Cont.)
z PLMN Selection in VPLMNs
If a UE is in a VPLMN, it scans the “user controlled PLMN
selector” field or the “operator controlled PLMN selector” field
in the PLMN list to find the HPLMN or the PLMN with higher
priority according to the requirement of the automatic PLMN
selection mode.
z A value of T minutes may be stored in the SIM. T is either in the range from 6 minutes to 8
hours in 6-minute steps or it indicates that no periodic attempts shall be made. If no value is
stored in the SIM, a default value of 60 minutes is used.
z After the UE is switched on, a period of at least 2 minutes and at most T minutes shall elapse
before the first attempt is made.
z The UE shall make an attempt if the UE is on the VPLMN at time T after the last attempt.
9
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
10
Structure of System Information
z System information is organized as a tree, including:
MIB (Master Information Block )
SB (Scheduling Block )
SIB (System Information Block )
z System information is used for the network to broadcast network information to UEs camping
on a cell so as to control the behavior of UEs.
z MIB
When selecting a new cell, the UE reads the MIB. The UE may locate the MIB by
predefined scheduling information. The IEs in the MIB includes MIB value tag, PLMN
type, PLMN identity, reference and scheduling information for a number of SIBs in a
cell or one or two SBs in a cell.
z SB
Scheduling Block (SB) gives reference and scheduling information to other SIBs. The
scheduling information of a SIB may be included in only one of MIB and SB.
z SIB
System Information Block (SIB) contains actual system information. It consists of
system information elements (IEs) with the same purpose.
z Scheduling information for a system information block may only be included in either the
master information block or one of the scheduling blocks.
11
System Information
z SIB1: Contains the system information for NAS and the
timer/counter for UE
z SIB2: Contains the URA information
z SIB3: Contains the parameters for cell selection and cell re-
selection
z SIB5: Contains parameters for the common physical channels of
the cell
z SIB7: Contains the uplink interference level and the refreshing
timer for SIB7
z SIB11: Contains measurement controlling information
z SIB4: Contains parameters for cell selection and cell re-selection while UE is in connected
mode
z SIB6: Contains parameters for the common physical channels of the cell while UE is in
connected mode
z SIB8: Contains the CPCH static information
z SIB9: Contains the CPCH dynamic information
z SIB10: Contains information to be used by UEs having their DCH controlled by a DRAC
procedure. Used in FDD mode only. To be used in CELL_DCH state only. Changes so often,
its decoding is controlled by a timer
z SIB12: Contains measurement controlling information in connecting mode
z SIB13: Contains ANSI-41 system information
z SIB14: Contains the information in TDD mode
z SIB15: Contains the position service information
z SIB16: Contains the needed pre-configuration information for handover from other RAT to
UTRAN
z SIB17: Contains the configuration information for TDD
z SIB18: Contains the PLMN identities of the neighboring cells
To be used in shared networks to help with the cell reselection process
12
Reception of System Information
z The UE shall read system information broadcast on a BCH
transport channel when the UE is in idle mode or in
connected mode, that is, in CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH, or
URA_PCH state.
z The UE may use the scheduling information in MIB and SB to locate each SIB to be acquired.
If the UE receives a SIB in a position according to the scheduling information and consider the
content valid, it will read and store it.
13
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
14
Cell Selection
z When the PLMN is selected and the UE is in idle mode, the
UE starts to select a cell to camp on and to obtain services.
z There are four states involved in cell selection:

Camped normally
Any cell selection
Camped on any cell
Connected mode
z Camped normally: The cell that UE camps on is called the suitable cell. In this state, the UE
obtains normal service.
z Any cell selection: In this state, the UE shall attempt to find an acceptable cell of an any PLMN
to camp on, trying all RATs that are supported by the UE and searching first for a high quality
cell
z Camped on any cell: The cell that UE camps on is called the acceptable cell. In this state the
UE obtains limited service. The UE shall regularly attempt to find a suitable cell of the selected
PLMN, trying all RATs that are supported by the UE.
z Connected mode: When returning to idle mode, the UE shall use the procedure Cell selection
when leaving connected mode in order to find a suitable cell to camp on and enter state
Camped normally. If no suitable cell is found in cell reselection evaluation process, the UE
enters the state Any cell selection.
15
Cell Selection (Cont.)
z Two types of cell selection:
Initial cell selection
If no cell information is stored for the PLMN, the UE starts this
procedure.
Stored information cell selection

If cell information is stored for the PLMN, the UE starts this
procedure.
z Initial cell selection: If no cell information is stored for the PLMN, the UE starts the initial cell
selection. For this procedure, the UE need not know in advance which Radio Frequency (RF)
channels are UTRA bearers. The UE scans all RF channels in the UTRA band according to its
capabilities to find a suitable cell of the selected PLMN. On each carrier, the UE need only
search for the strongest cell. Once a suitable cell is found, this cell shall be selected.
z Stored information cell selection: For this procedure, the UE need know the central frequency
information and other optional cell parameters that are obtained from the measurement control
information received before, such as scrambling codes. After this procedure is started, the UE
selects a suitable cell if it finds one. Otherwise, the "Initial cell selection" procedure is triggered.
16
Cell Selection Criteria
z Criterion S is used by the UE to judge whether the cell is
suitable to camped on.
z Criterion S : Srxlev > 0 & Squal > 0, where:
S qual = Qqualmeas − Qqual min

S rxlev = Qrxlevmeas − Qrxlev min − Pcompensation
z If the pilot strength and quality of one cell meet S criteria, UE will stay in this cell and get other
system information. Then, UE will initiate a location update registration process.
z If the cell doesn’t satisfy S criteria, UE will get adjacent cells information from SIB11. Then, UE
will judge weather these cells satisfy S criteria. If the adjacent cell is suitable, UE will stay in
the adjacent cell.
z If no cell satisfies S criteria, UE will take the area as dead zone and continue the PLMN
selection and reselection procedure.
Parameters Explanation
Squal Cell quality value (dB)
Srxlev Cell RX level value (dBm)
Qqualmeas Measured cell quality value. The quality of the received signal expressed in
CPICH Ec/N0 (dB) for current cell
Qrxlevmeas Measured cell RX level value. This is received signal, CPICH RSCP for
current cells (dBm)
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB)
Qrxlevmin Minimum required RX level in the cell (dBm)
Pcompensation Max（UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH-P_MAX，0）, dBm
UE_TXPWR_ Maximum TX power level an UE may use when accessing the cell on
MAX_RACH RACH (read in system information) (dBm)
P_MAX Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm)

17
Parameters of S Criterion
z QUALMEAS
Parameter name: Cell Se-reselection quality measure
Recommended value: CPICH_ECNO
z QQUALMIN
Parameter name: Min quality level
Recommended value: -18, namely -18dB
z QUALMEAS
Parameter name: Cell Sel-reselection quality measure
Value range: CPICH_ECNO(CPICH Ec/N0),CPICH_RSCP(CPICH RSCP)
Physical unit: None.
Content: Cell selection and reselection quality measure, may be set to CPICH Ec/N0
or CPICH RSCP.
Recommended value: CPICH_ECNO.
z QQUALMIN
Parameter name: Min quality level
Value range: -24~0
Physical value range: -24~0; step: 1
Physical unit: dB
Content: The minimum required quality level corresponding to CPICH Ec/No. The UE
can camp on the cell only when the measured CPICH Ec/No is greater than the value
of this parameter.
Recommended value: -18
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query it through LST
CELLSELRESEL, and modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL.
18
Parameters of S Criterion
z QRXLEVMIN
Parameter name: Min Rx level
Recommended value: -58, namely -115dBm
z MAXALLOWEDULTXPOWER
Parameter name: Max allowed UE UL TX power
Recommended value: 21, namely 21dBm
z QRXLEVMIN
Parameter name: Min Rx level
Value range: -58~-13.
Physical value range: -115~-25; step: 2 (-58:-115; -57:-113; ..., -13:-25 ).
Physical unit: dBm.
Content: The minimum required RX level corresponding to CPICH RSCP. The UE can
camp on the cell only when the measured CPICH RSCP is greater than the value of
this parameter.
Recommended value: -58.
Value range: -50~33
Physical value range: -50~33; step: 1
Physical unit: dBm
Content: The maximum allowed uplink transmit power of a UE in the cell, which is
related to the network planning. Content: Allowed maximum power transmitted on
RACH in the cell. It is related to network planning.
19
Cell Reselection
z After selecting a cell and camping on it, the UE periodically
searches for a better cell according to the cell reselection
criteria. If finding such a cell, the UE selects this cell to
camp on.
z UE should monitor the quality of current cell and neighbor cells in order to camp on the better
cell to initiate service. The better cell is the most suitable one for the UE to camp on and obtain
services. The QoS of this cell is not necessarily more satisfying.
20
Measurement Start Criteria (Cont.)
z Intra-frequency measurement
Squal ≤ Sintrasearch
Qqualmeas − Qqualmin ≤ Sintrasearch
Qqualmeas ≤ Qqualmin + Sintrasearch
z Parameters of the measurement start criteria
Name Description
Qqualmin Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB) .
Measurement threshold for UE to trigger intra-frequency cell reselection,
Sintrasearch
compared with Squal.
Measurement threshold for UE to trigger inter-frequency cell reselection,
Sintersearch
Measurement threshold for UE to trigger inter-RAT cell reselection,
SsearchRATm
21
z Inter-frequency measurement
Squal ≤ Sintersearch
Qqualmeas − Qqualmin ≤ Sintersearch
Qqualmeas ≤ Qqualmin + Sintersearch
Name Description
Sintrasearch
Sintersearch
SsearchRATm
22
z Inter-RAT measurement
Squal ≤ SsearchRATm
Qqualmeas − Qqualmin ≤ SsearchRATm
Qqualmeas ≤ Qqualmin + SsearchRATm
Name Description
Sintrasearch
Sintersearch
SsearchRATm
23
Parameters of Measurement Start Criteria
z IDLESINTRASEARCH
Parameter name: Intra-freq cell reselection threshold for idle
mode
Recommended value: None
z CONNSINTRASEARCH
Parameter name: Intra-freq cell reselection threshold for
connected mode
z IDLESINTRASEARCH
Parameter name: Intra-freq cell reselection threshold for idle mode
Value range: {{-16~10},{127}} .
Physical value range: -32~20; step: 2.
Physical unit: dB.
Content: A threshold for intra-frequency cell reselection in idle mode. When the quality
(CPICH Ec/No measured by UE) of the serving cell is lower than this threshold plus
the [Qqualmin] of the cell, the intra-frequency cell reselection procedure will be started.
Recommended value: None.
z CONNSINTRASEARCH
Parameter name: Intra-freq cell reselection threshold for connected mode
Value range: {{-16~10},{127}} .
Physical unit: dB
Content: A threshold for intra-frequency cell reselection in connect mode. When the
quality (CPICH Ec/No measured by UE) of the serving cell is lower than this threshold
plus the [Qqualmin] of the cell, the intra-frequency cell reselection procedure will be
started.
24
z IDLESINTERSEARCH
Parameter name: Inter-freq cell reselection threshold for idle
mode
z CONNSINTERSEARCH
Parameter name: Inter-freq cell reselection threshold for
connected mode
z IDLESINTERSEARCH
Parameter name: Inter-freq cell reselection threshold for idle mode
Value range: {{-16~10},{127}} .
Physical unit: dB.
Content: A threshold for inter-frequency cell reselection in idle mode. When the quality
(CPICH Ec/No measured by UE) of the serving cell is lower than this threshold plus
the [Qqualmin] of the cell, the inter-frequency cell reselection procedure will be started.
z CONNSINTERSEARCH
Parameter name: Inter-freq cell reselection threshold for connected mode
Value range: {{-16~10},{127}} .
Physical unit: dB
Content: A threshold for inter-frequency cell reselection in connect mode. When the
quality (CPICH Ec/No measured by UE) of the serving cell is lower than this threshold
plus the [Qqualmin] of the cell, the inter-frequency cell reselection procedure will be
started.
25
z SSEARCHRAT
Parameter name: Inter-RAT cell reselection threshold
z SSEARCHRAT
Parameter name: Inter-RAT cell reselection threshold
Value range: {{-16~10},{127}} .
Physical unit: dB.
Content: A threshold for inter-RAT cell reselection. When the quality (CPICH Ec/No
measured by UE) of the serving cell is lower than this threshold plus the [Qqualmin] of
the cell, the inter-RAT cell reselection procedure will be started.
26
Measurement Start Criteria Description
z The intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT measurement criteria are as shown in the
figure.
z Usually, Sintrasearch > Sintersearch > SsearchRATm
27
Cell Reselection Criteria
z Criterion R is used for intra-frequency, inter-frequency cells
and inter-RAT cell reselection.
z The cell-ranking criterion R is defined by :
Rs = Qmeas , s + Qhysts
Rn = Qmeas ,n − Qoffset s ,n
z The cells are ranked according to R criteria specified above ,deriving Qmeas,n and Qmeas,s and
calculating R value.
z In Rs, s means serving cell. In Rn, n means neighbor cell.
z The offset Qoffset1s,n is used for Qoffsets,n to calculate Rn. The hysteresis Qhyst1s is used
for Qhysts to calculate Rs.
z If a TDD or GSM cell is ranked as the best cell, the UE shall reselect that TDD or GSM cell.
z If an FDD cell is ranked as the best cell and the quality measure for cell selection and
reselection is set to CPICH RSCP, the UE shall reselect that FDD cell.
z If an FDD cell is ranked as the best cell and the quality measure for cell selection and
reselection is set to CPICH Ec/N0, the UE shall perform a second ranking of the FDD cells
according to the R criteria specified above.
In this case, however, the UE uses the measurement quantity CPICH Ec/N0 for deriving the
Qmeas,n and Qmeas,s and then calculating the R values of the FDD cells. The offset
Qoffset2s,n is used for Qoffsets,n to calculate Rn, the hysteresis Qhyst2s is used for Qhysts to
calculate Rs.
28
Hysteresis and Time Interval
Quality
Qhyst,s Qmeas,n
Rn
Qoffsets,n Rs
Qmeas,s
Time
Treselection
z In all the previous cases, the UE can reselect a new cell only when the following conditions are
met:
The new cell is better ranked than the serving cell during a time interval Treselection.
More than one second has elapsed since the UE camped on the current serving cell.
29
Parameters of R Criteria
z IDLEQHYST1S
Parameter name: Hysteresis 1 for idle mode
Recommended value: 2, namely 4dB
z CONNQHYST1S
Parameter name: Hysteresis 1 for connect mode
Recommended value: 2, namely 4dB
z IDLEQHYST1S
Value range: 0~20.
Physical value range: 0~40; step: 2.
Physical unit: dB.
Content: The hysteresis value in idle mode for serving FDD cells in case the quality
measurement for cell selection and reselection is set to CPICH RSCP. It is related to
the slow fading feature of the area where the cell is located. The greater the slow
fading variance is, the greater this parameter.
Recommended value: 2.
z CONNQHYST1S
Parameter name: Hysteresis 1 for connected mode
Value range: 0~20.
Physical unit: dB.
Content: The hysteresis value in connect mode for serving FDD cells in case the
quality measurement for cell selection and reselection is set to CPICH RSCP. It is
related to the slow fading feature of the area where the cell is located. The greater the
slow fading variance is, the greater this parameter.
30
Parameters of R Criteria (Cont.)
z IDLEQHYST2S
Recommended value: Qhyst1s for idle mode
z CONNQHYST2S
Recommended value: Qhyst1s for connected mode.
z IDLEQHYST2S
Value range: {{0~20},{255}} .
Physical unit: dB.
Content: The hysteresis value in idle mode for serving FDD cells in case the quality
measurement for cell selection and reselection is set to CPICH Ec/No. It is related to the slow
fading feature of the area where the cell is located. The greater the slow fading variance is, the
greater this parameter. It is optional. If it is not configured, [Hysteresis 1] will be adopted as the
value.
Recommended value: Qhyst1s for idle mode .
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query it through LST CELLSELRESEL, and
modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL.
z CONNQHYST2S
Value range: {{0~20},{255}} .
Physical unit: dB.
Content: The hysteresis value in connect mode for serving FDD cells in case the quality
measurement for cell selection and reselection is set to CPICH RSCP. It is related to the slow
fading feature of the area where the cell is located. The greater the slow fading variance is, the
greater this parameter.
Recommended value: Qhyst1s for connected mode. .
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query it through LST CELLSELRESEL, and
modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL.
31
z TRESELECTIONS
Parameter name: Reselection delay time
Recommended value: 1, namely 1s.
z TRESELECTIONS
Parameter name: Reselection delay time
Value range: 0~31 .
Physical unit: s.
Content: If the signal quality of a neighboring cell is better than the serving cell during
the specified time of this parameter, the UE will reselect the neighboring cell. It is used
to avoid ping-pong reselection between different cells. Note: The value 0 corresponds
to the default value defined in the protocol.
32
z IDLEQOFFSET1SN
Parameter name: IdleQoffset1sn
Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB.
z CONNQOFFSET1SN
Parameter name: ConnQoffset1sn
z IDLEQOFFSET1SN
Offset of cell CPICH RSCP measurement value in cell selection or reselection when the UE is in
idle mode
Value range: -50 to +50 .
Physical value range: -50 to +50; step: 1.
Physical unit: dB.
Content: This parameter is used for moving the border of a cell. The larger the value of this
parameter, the lower the probability of neighboring cell selection.
Set this parameter through ADD INTRAFREQNCELL / ADD INTERFREQNCELL, query it
through LST INTRAFREQNCELL / LST INTERFREQNCELL, and modify it through MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL / MOD INTERFREQNCELL.
z CONNQOFFSET1SN
connected mode
Physical value range: -50 to +50 ; step: 1.
Physical unit: dB.
33
z IDLEQOFFSET2SN
z CONNQOFFSET2SN
z IDLEQOFFSET2SN
Offset of cell CPICH Ec/No measurement value in cell selection or reselection when the UE is in
idle mode
Physical value range: -50 to +50; step: 1.
Physical unit: dB.
z CONNQOFFSET2SN
connected mode
Physical value range: -50 to +50 ; step: 1.
Physical unit: dB.
34
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
35
Location Registration
z The location registration includes:
Location update (for non-GPRS)
Route update (for GPRS)
z The location registration is used for the PLMN to trace the current status of the UE and to
ensure that the UE is connected with the network when the UE does not perform any operation
for a long period.
36
Periodic Location Registration
z Periodic location registration is controlled by a Periodic
Location Update timer (T3212) or a Periodic Routing Area
Update timer (T3312)
z Periodic location registration may be used to periodically notify the network of the availability of
the UE.
z T3212 is for non-GPRS operation
z T3312 is for GPRS operation
37
Parameters of Location Registration
z T3212
Parameter name: Periodical location update timer [6min]
Recommended value: 10, namely 60min
z ATT
Parameter name: Attach/detach indication
Recommended value: ALLOWED
z T3212
Parameter name: Periodical location update timer [6min]
Value range: 0~255.
Physical unit: 6 min.
Content: This parameter indicates the time length of the periodical location update.
Periodical location update is implemented by MS through the location update
procedure. 0: The periodical update procedure is not used. This parameter is valid only
when [CN domain ID] is set as CS_DOMAIN.
Set this parameter through ADD CNDOMAIN, query it through LST CNDOMAIN,
modify it through MOD CNDOMAIN.
z ATT
Parameter name: Attach/detach indication
Value range: NOT_ALLOWED, ALLOWED .
Content: NOT_ALLOWED indicates that MS cannot apply the IMSI attach/detach
procedure. ALLOWED indicates that MS can apply the IMSI attach/detach procedure.
This parameter is valid only when [CN domain ID] is set as CS_DOMAIN.
Recommended value: ALLOWED.
Set this parameter through ADD CNDOMAIN, query it through LST CNDOMAIN,
38
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
39
Paging Initiation
z CN initiated paging
z Establish a signaling connection
z UTRAN initiated paging

z Trigger the cell update procedure
z Trigger reading of updated system information
z For CN originated paging:

In order to request UTRAN connect to UE, CN initiates the paging procedure,
transmits paging message to the UTRAN through Iu interface, and UTRAN transmits
the paging message from CN to UE through the paging procedure on Uu interface,
which will make the UE initiate a signaling connection setup process with the CN.
z For UTRAN originated paging:
When the cell system message is updated: When system messages change, the
UTRAN will trigger paging process in order to inform UE in the idle, CELL_PCH or
URA_PCH state to carry out the system message update, so that the UE can read the
updated system message.
UE state transition: In order to trigger UE in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state to
carry out state transition (for example, transition to the CELL_FACH state), the UTRAN
will perform a paging process. Meanwhile, the UE will initiate a cell update or URA
update process, as a reply to the paging.
40
Paging Type 1
z If UE is in CELL_PCH,URA_PCH or IDLE state，the paging
message will be transmitted on PCCH with paging type 1
CN RNC1 RNC2 NODEB1.1 NODEB2.1 UE
PAGING
RANAP RANAP
RANAP PAGING RANAP
PCCH: PAGING TYPE 1
PCCH: PAGING TYPE 1
z Paging type 1:
The message is transmitted in one LA or RA according to LAI or RAI.
After calculating the paging time, the paging message will be transmitted at that time
If UE is in CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, the UTRAN transmits the paging
information in PAGING TYPE 1 message to UE. After received paging message, UE
performs a cell update procedure to transit state to CELL_FACH.
z As shown in the above figure, the CN initiates paging in a location area (LA), which is covered
by two RNCs. After receiving a paging message, the RNC searches all the cells corresponding
to the LAI, and then calculates the paging time, at which it will send the PAGING TYPE 1
message to these cells through the PCCH.
41
Paging Type 2
z If UE is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH state，the paging
message will be transmitted on DCCH with paging type 2
CN SRNC UE
PAGING
RANAP RANAP
DCCH: PAGING TYPE 2

RRC RRC
z Paging type 2:
If UE is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH state，the paging message will be transmitted
on DCCH with paging type 2
The message will be only transmitted in a cell
z As shown in the above figure, if the UE is in the CELL_-DCH or CELL_FACH state, the
UTRAN will immediately transmit PAGING TYPE 2 message to the paged UE on DCCH
channel.
42
Typical Call Flow of UE
U E N AS U E AS N SS M SC
paging
RANAP RANAP
R R _P A IN G _IN D paging
R R _E S T_R E Q (P A G IN G R E S P O N S E )
R R C setup process
IN ITIA L_D IR E C T_TR A N S FE R
A U TH E N TIC A TIO N REQUEST (P A G IN G R E S P O N S E )
AU TH E N TIC A TIO N R E SP O N S E
R R _S E C U R ITY _C O N TR O L_R E Q
(IK C K )
S ecu rity m o de co ntrol
S E TU P
C A LL C O N FIR M
R A B se tu p pro cess
A LE R T
CONNECT
C O N N E C T A C K N O W LE D G E
z Many problems will cause the target UE cannot receive the paging message properly
Power setting of paging channel is unreasonable.
Unreasonable paging strategies will result in paging channel congestion, which can
cause paging message loss.
Paging parameter is unreasonable
Equipment fault
43
DRX Procedure
z UE receives the paging indicator on PICH periodically, that
is the Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
z The value for the DRX paging cycle length is determined as

follows: :
DRX Cycle Length ＝ (2^K)×PBP frames
z In idle mode, the UE can monitor the paging in two modes: one is to decode SCCPCH directly
every 10ms, the other is to decode the PICH periodically. The second one is the DRX, which is
Discontinuous Reception Mechanism.
z The paging period formula:
DRX Cycle Length ＝ (2^K)*PBP frames
K is the “CN domain specific DRX cycle length coefficient”, which is broadcasted in
SIB1. The typical value is 6.
PBP is paging block period, which is 1 for FDD mode
The paging period should be 640ms if K is 6
44
DRX Procedure (Cont.)
z Through DRX, UE only listens to PICH at certain predefined
time. And UE will read the paging information on SCCPCH if
the paging indicator is 1.
z The value of the Paging Occasion is determined as follows:
Paging Occasion (CELL SFN) =
{(IMSI mod M) mod (DRX cycle length div PBP)} * PBP
+ n * DRX cycle length + Frame Offset
z Paging SFN formula:

Paging Occasion (CELL SFN) = {(IMSI mod M) mod (DRX cycle length div PBP)}
*PBP + n *DRX cycle length + Frame Offset
n =0, 1, 2……and the requirement is the calculated CELL SFN must be below its
maximum value 4096
Frame Offset is 0 for FDD mode
M is the number of SCCPCH which carries PCH, and the typical value is 1
The formula cloud be simplified as: SFN = IMSI mod (2^K) + n * (2^K)
45
z UE must calculate q to know which PI to monitor in one
frame of PICH
z The q value is achieved by the following formula :
⎛ ⎢ Np ⎥ ⎞
q = ⎜⎜ PI + ⎢((18 × (SFN + ⎣SFN / 8⎦ + ⎣SFN / 64⎦ + ⎣SFN / 512⎦)) mod144)× ⎟ mod Np
⎝ ⎣ 144 ⎥⎦ ⎟⎠
z Where, PI = (IMSI div 8192) mod NP
z SFN is the paging occasion of the UE

z As shown in the followed figure, the UE needs to monitor the frames (paging occasions)
indicated by the red dots, and then decodes the qth PI of this frame.
One DRX cycle
2^K-1 ¡ ¡£
¡ £¡ £
¡¡£ ££
0 4095
PI PI ¡ £
¡ £
¡ £P I ¡ £
¡ £
¡ £ PI
0 1 q NP-1
46
z Time offset between PICH and S-CCPCH
PICH frame containing paging indicator
Associated S-CCPCH frame
τPICH
z The timing relationship between PICH and S-CCPCH is defined by the above figure, and the
interval is 3 slots duration (2ms, 7680 chips).
47
Parameters of DRX
z DRXCYCLELENCOEF
Parameter name: DRX cycle length coefficient
Recommended value: 6
z PICHMODE
Parameter name: PICH mode
Recommended value: V36.
z DRXCYCLELENCOEF
Parameter name: DRX cycle length coefficient
Value range: 6~9 .
Content: This parameter is broadcasted on SIB1. This parameter is used when a UE is
in idle mode.
Set this parameter through ADD CNDOMAIN, query it through LST CNDOMAIN, and
z PICHMODE
Parameter name: PICH mode
Value range: V18, V36, V72, V144 .
Physical value range: 18, 36, 72, 144 .
Content: Indicating the number of PIs contained in each frame on the PICH.
Recommended value: V36 .
Set this parameter through ADD PICH, query it through LST PICH.
48
Parameters of DRX
z MACCPAGEREPEAT
Parameter name: Number of page re-TX
z MACCPAGEREPEAT
Parameter name: Number of page re-TX
Number of retransmissions of paging message
Value range: 0~2 .
Content: If the number of retransmissions of paging message exceeds this parameter
value, retransmissions stop.
Set this parameter through SET WFMRCFGDATA, query it through LST
WFMRCFGDATA.
49
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
50
Two Working Mode of UE
z Idle mode
After turning on, UE will stay in idle mode
z Connected mode
UE will switch to connected mode which could be CELL_FACH
state or CELL_DCH state from the idle mode
After releasing RRC connection, UE will switch to the idle

mode from the connected mode
z The most important difference between idle mode and connected mode is whether UE has
RRC connection with UTRAN or not.
z In idle mode, UE will be identified by IMSI, TMSI or PTMSI and so on.
z In connected mode, UE will be identified by URNTI (UTRAN Radio Network Temporary
Identity), which is the ID of one RRC connection.
51
Random Access Procedure
z Definition
Random access procedure is initiated by UE in order to get
service from the system. Meanwhile, the access channels are
allocated to the UE by system
z This process may happen in the following scenarios:

Attach and detach
LA update and RA update
Signaling connection for services
52
Random Access Channel
z Definition
AICH access
slots SFN mod 2 = 0 SFN mod 2 = 1
τp-a #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14
#0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14
PRACH
access slots Access slot set 1 Access slot set 2
10 ms 10 ms
z UE will transmit the preamble at the access time slot

z Each 20ms access frame is composed of two 10ms radio frames, which is divided into 15
access time slot, and 5120 chips for each slot
z The PRACH access slots, AICH access slots and their time offset are showed in the above
figure
53
RACH Sub-Channels
z The access slots of different RACH sub-channels are illustrated by
the following table
SFN Random access sub-channels number
mod 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 12 13 14 8 9 10 11
2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 9 10 11 12 13 14 8
4 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5
5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
6 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
z A RACH sub-channel defines a sub-set of the total set of uplink access slots. There are a total
of 12 RACH sub-channels.
54
Access Service Class
z The PRACH resources can be classified into several ASCs,
so as to provide RACH applications with different priorities.
z For Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) mode, the PRACH resources include access timeslots
and preamble signatures, which can be classified into several ASCs, so as to provide RACH
applications with different priorities.
z The ASCs range from 0 to 7, and the quantity of ASCs is 8. "0" indicates the highest priority
and "7" indicates the lowest priority.
z The system will assign random access sub-channels and signatures according to the ASC
(Access Service Class ) of UE.
z Set ASC of PRACH through ADD PRACHASC, modify it through MOD PRACHASC, and
remove it through RMV PRACHASC.
55
Access Control
z “Access Control” is used by network operators to prevent
overload of radio access channels under critical conditions.
Access class 0~Access Class 9
Access class 11~Access Class 15
Access class 10
z The access class number is stored in the SIM/USIM.

z Access class 0~9 are allocated to all the users. And the 10 classes show the same priority.
z Access class 11~15 are allocated to specific high priority users as follows. (The enumeration is
not meant as a priority sequence):
Access class 15: PLMN staff
Access class 14: users subscribing to emergency services
Access class 13: public organizations
Access class 12: users subscribing to security services
Access class 11: users responsible for PLMN management
z Access Class 10 indicates whether or not network access for Emergency Calls is allowed for
UEs with access classes 0 to 9 or without an IMSI. For UEs with access classes 11 to 15,
Emergency Calls are not allowed if both "Access class 10" and the relevant Access Class (11
to 15) are barred. Otherwise, Emergency Calls are allowed.
56
Mapping between AC and ASC
z The AC-ASC mapping information is optional and used for
the System Information Block 5 (SIB5) only.
z Set the mapping between AC and ASC through ADD PRACHACTOASCMAP, modify it
through MOD PRACHACTOASCMAP, and remove it through RMV PRACHACTOASCMAP.
57
Random Access Procedure
START
Choose a RACH sub channel from

available ones
Get available signatures
Set Preamble Retrans Max
Set Preamble_Initial_Power
Send a preamble
No AI
Choose a access slot again Check the corresponding AI
Get positive AI
Get negative AI
Choose a signature and
increase preamble transmit power Increase message part power by
p-m based on preamble power
The counter of preamble retransmit

Subtract-1, Commanded preamble Send the corresponding
power increased by Power Ramp Step message part
Set physical status to be RACH

Y Counter> 0 & Preamble Set physical status to be Nack
message transmitted
power-maximum allowed power on AICH received
<6 dB
N
Report the physical status to MAC
Set physical status to be Nack
on AICH received
END
58
z Physical random access procedure
1. Derive the available uplink access slots, in the next full access slot set, for the set of
available RACH sub-channels within the given ASC. Randomly select one access slot
among the ones previously determined. If there is no access slot available in the
selected set, randomly select one uplink access slot corresponding to the set of
available RACH sub-channels within the given ASC from the next access slot set. The
random function shall be such that each of the allowed selections is chosen with equal
probability
2. Randomly select a signature from the set of available signatures within the given
ASC
3. Set the Preamble Retransmission Counter to Preamble_ Retrans_ Max
4. Set the parameter Commanded Preamble Power to Preamble_Initial_Power
5. Transmit a preamble using the selected uplink access slot, signature, and preamble
transmission power
6. If no positive or negative acquisition indicator (AI ≠ +1 nor –1) corresponding to the
selected signature is detected in the downlink access slot corresponding to the
selected uplink access slot:
A: Select the next available access slot in the set of available RACH sub-
channels within the given ASC
B: select a signature
C: Increase the Commanded Preamble Power
D: Decrease the Preamble Retransmission Counter by one. If the Preamble
Retransmission Counter > 0 then repeat from step 6. Otherwise exit the
physical random access procedure
7. If a negative acquisition indicator corresponding to the selected signature is
detected in the downlink access slot corresponding to the selected uplink access slot,
exit the physical random access procedure Signature
8. If a positive acquisition indicator corresponding to the selected signature is detected ,
Transmit the random access message three or four uplink access slots after the uplink
access slot of the last transmitted preamble
9. Exit the physical random access procedure
59
RRC Connection Message
z Typical RRC connection messages
RRC_CONNECTION_REQUEST
RRC_CONNECTION_SETUP
RRC_CONNECTION_SETUP_COMPLETE
RRC_CONNECTION_RELEASE
z When a UE needs network service, it first sets up RRC connection as follows:

The UE sends a RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message from the cell where it
camps to the RNC.
The RNC allocates related resources for the UE and sends an RRC CONNECTION
SETUP message to the UE.
The UE sends a RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the RNC. The
RRC connection setup ends.
60
UE Timers and Constants in Idle Mode
z T300
Parameter name: Timer 300 [ms]
Recommended value: D2000, namely 2000ms
z N300
Parameter name: Constant 300
z T300
Parameter name: Timer 300[ms]
Value range: D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000, D1200, D1400, D1600, D1800,
D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000 .
Physical value range: 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000,
3000, 4000, 6000, 8000
Physical unit: ms
Content: T300 is started after the UE transmits the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST
message and stopped after the UE receives the RRC CONNECTION SETUP
message. RRC CONNECTION REQUEST resents upon the expiry of the timer if V300
less than or equal to N300. Otherwise, the UE enters idle mode.
Recommended value: D2000.
Set this parameter through SET IDLEMODETIMER, query it through SET
IDLEMODETIMER.
z N300
Value range: 0~7 .
Content: Maximum number of retransmission of RRC CONNECTION REQUEST .
IDLEMODETIMER.
61
UE Timers and Constants in Idle Mode
z T312
Parameter name: Timer 312 [s]
Recommended value: 6, namely 6s
z N312
Recommended value: D1, namely 1
z T312
Parameter name: Timer 312[s]
Value range: 1~15 .
Physical value range: 1~15s
Physical unit: s
Content: T312 is started after the UE starts to establish a DCH and stopped when the
UE detects N312 consecutive "in sync" indications from L1. It indicates physical
channel setup failure upon the expiry of the timer.
IDLEMODETIMER.
z N312
Value range: D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000 .
Physical value range: 1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000
Content: Maximum number of consecutive "in sync" indications received from L1. .
Recommended value: D1.
IDLEMODETIMER.
62
RRC Connection Establish Channel
Type and Bit Rate
z RRCCAUSE
Parameter name: Cause of RRC connection establishment
Recommended value: none
z SIGCHTYPE
Parameter name: Channel type for RRC establishment
Recommended value: none
z RRCCAUSE
Parameter name: Cause of RRC connection establishment
Value range: ORIGCONVCALLEST, ORIGSTREAMCALLEST, ORIGINTERCALLEST,
ORIGBKGCALLEST, ORIGSUBSTRAFFCALLEST, TERMCONVCALLEST,
TERMSTREAMCALLEST, TERMINTERCALLEST, TERMBKGCALLEST,
EMERGCALLEST, INTERRATCELLRESELEST, INTERRATCELLCHGORDEREST,
REGISTEST, DETACHEST, ORIGHIGHPRIORSIGEST, ORIGLOWPRIORSIGEST,
CALLREEST, TERMHIGHPRIORSIGEST, TERMLOWPRIORSIGEST,
TERMCAUSEUNKNOWN, DEFAULTEST.
Content: The cause of Rrc connection establishment. .
Recommended value: none.
Set this parameter through SET RRCESTCAUSE, query it through LST
RRCESTCAUSE.
z SIGCHTYPE
Parameter name: Channel type for RRC establishment
Value range: FACH, DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING, DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING.
Content: FACH indicates that the RRC is established on the common channel.
DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING indicates that the RRC is established on the dedicated
channel of 3.4 kbit/s. DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING indicates that the RRC is established
on the dedicated channel of 13.6 kbit/s. .
Recommended value: none.
RRCESTCAUSE.
63
RRC Connection Establish Channel
Type and Bit Rate
z INTRAMEASCTRL
Parameter name: IntraMeas Ctrl Ind for RRC establishment
Recommended value: SUPPORT
z INTRAMEASCTRL
Parameter name: IntraMeas Ctrl Ind for RRC establishment
Value range: NOT_SUPPORT, SUPPORT.
Content: NOT_SUPPORT indicates that the Intrafreq measurement control message
will be send in RRC Connection Establishment. SUPPORT indicates that the Intrafreq
measurement control will not be send in RRC Connection Establishment.
Recommended value: SUPPORT .
RRCESTCAUSE.
64
Thank you
www.huawei.com
65
WCDMA Power Control
and Relevant Parameters
www.huawei.com
263
Objectives
z Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe the purpose and function of power control
Explain open loop power control and parameters
Explain inner loop power control and relevant parameters
Explain outer loop power control and relevant parameters
264
Contents
1. Power Control Overview
2. Open Loop Power Control
3. Closed Loop Power Control
265
Contents
266
Purpose of Uplink Power Control
z Uplink Transmission Character
Self-interference system
Uplink capacity is limited by interference level
Near-far effect
Fading
z Uplink Power Control Function
Ensure uplink quality with minimum transmission power
Decrease interference to other UE, and increase capacity
Solve the near-far effect
Save UE transmission power
z CDMA system have the embedded characteristics of self-interference, for uplink one
user’s transmission power become interference to others.
z The more connected users, the higher interference. Generally the capacity is limited by
interference level.
z WCDMA suffer from Near-far effect, which means if all UE use the same transmission
power, the one close to the NodeB may block the entire cell.
z Uplink power control can guarantee the service quality and minimize the required
transmission power. It will resolve the near-far effect and resist fading of signal
propagation. By lowering the uplink interference level, the system capacity will be
increased.
267
Purpose of Downlink Power Control
z Downlink Transmission Character
Interference among different subscribers
Interference from other adjacent cells
Downlink capacity is limited by NodeB transmission power
Fading
z Downlink Power Control Function
Ensure downlink quality with minimum transmission power
Decrease interference to other cells, and increase capacity
Save NodeB transmission power
z The downlink has different characteristics from the uplink, for downlink interference is
caused by multi-path, part of one user’s power also become interference to others.
z Downlink power from adjacent cells also is one part of interference to the own cell.
z Transmission power of NodeB is shared by all users channels, so downlink capacity

usually is considered to be limited by transmission power.
z Downlink power control also can guarantee the service quality and minimize the
required transmission power, so the capacity is maximized in case that interference is
lowered.
268
Effect of Power Control
20
Channel Fading
15
Transmitting power
Receiving power
10
Relative power (dB)
-5
-10
-15
-20
0 200 400 600 800
Time (ms)
z Because of channel fading in mobile communication system, the radio signal is

deteriorated and fluctuated, the fast power control become one key technology to resist
this phenomenon.
z In this figure, the channel fading is compensated by the transmitting power, which is
adjusted by the fast power control, so the receiving power is almost constant and the
radio propagation condition is improved.
269
Power Control Classification
z Open Loop Power Control

Uplink / Downlink Open Loop Power Control
z Closed Loop Power Control

Uplink / Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
Uplink / Downlink Outer Loop Power Control
z In WCDMA system, power control includes open loop and closed loop power control.
z Open loop power control is used to determine the initial transmission power, and the
closed loop power control adjusts the transmission power dynamically and
continuously during the connection.
z For uplink, the UE’s transmission power is adjusted; and for downlink, the NodeB’s
transmission power is adjusted.
270
Power Control For Physical Channels
z Power control methods are adopted for these physical channels:
“√" – can be applied, “×" – not applied
Open Loop Closed Loop Power Control

Physical No Power
Power Inner Loop Outer Loop
Channel Control
Control Power Control Power Control
DPDCH √ √ √ ×
DPCCH √ √ √ ×
SCH × × × √
PCCPCH × × × √
SCCPCH × × × √
PRACH √ × × ×
AICH × × × √
PICH × × × √
z Open loop power control is used in two cases:
1. to decide the initial transmission power of PRACH preamble.
2. to decide the initial transmission power of DPCCH / DPDCH.
z Closed loop power control is only applied on DPCCH and DPDCH
z For other common channels, power control is not applied, they will use fixed
transmission power:
The PCPICH power is defined by the PCPICH TRANSMIT POWER parameter

as an absolute value in dBm.
All other common channels power is defined in relation with the PCPICH
TRANSMIT POWER parameter, and measured in dB.
271
Common Physical Channel Power Parameters
z MAXTXPOWER
Parameter name: Max transmit power of cell
The recommended value is 430, namely 43dBm
z PCPICHPOWER
Parameter name: PCPICH transmit power
z MAXTXPOWER
Parameter name: Max transmit power of cell
Value Range: 0 to 500
Physical Value Range: 0dBm to 50 dBm, step 0.1dB
Content: The sum of the maximum transmit power of all DL channels in a cell.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP, query it through LST CELL and modify it
through MOD CELL
z PCPICHPOWER
Parameter name: PCPICH transmit power
Value Range: -100 to 500
Physical Value Range: -10dBm to 50 dBm, step 0.1dB
Content: This parameter should be set based on the actual environment and the
downlink coverage should be guaranteed firstly. If PCPICH transmit power is configured
too great, the cell capacity will be decreased, for power resources is occupied by
common channel and the interference to traffic channels is also increased.
Set this parameter through ADD PCPICH, query it through LST PCPICH and modify it
through MOD CELL
272
z PSCHPOWER or SSCHPOWER
Parameter name: PSCH / SCCH transmit power
The recommended value is -50, namely -5dB
z BCHPOWER
Parameter name: BCH transmit power
z PSCHPOWER or SSCHPOWER
Parameter name: PSCH / SCCH transmit power
Value range: -350 to 150.
Physical value range: -35 to 15, step 0.1dB
Content: The offset between the PSCH / SSCH transmit power and PCPICH transmit
power.
For PSCH Power, set it through ADD PSCH, and query it through LST PSCH; for SSCH
Power, set it through ADD SSCH, and query it through LST SSCH. And modify it through
MOD CELL
z BCHPOWER
Parameter name: BCH transmit power
Value Range：-350 to 150
Physical Value Range：-35 to 15 dB, step 0.1dB
Content: The offset between the BCH transmit power and PCPICH transmit power.
Set this parameter through ADD BCH, query it through LST BCH, and modify it through
MOD CELL
273
z MAXFACHPOWER
Parameter name: Max transmit power of FACH
The recommended value is 10, namely 1dB
z PCHPOWER
Parameter name: PCH transmit power
z MAXFACHPOWER
Parameter name: Max transmit power of FACH
Value range : -350 to 150
Content: The offset between the FACH transmit power and PCPICH transmit
power.
Set this parameter through ADD FACH, query it through LST FACH, and modify
it through MOD SCCPCH
z PCHPOWER
Parameter name: PCH transmit power
Content: The offset between the PCH transmit power and PCPICH transmit
power.
Set this parameter through ADD PCH, query it through LST PCH, and modify it
through MOD SCCPCH
274
z AICHPOWEROFFSET
Parameter name: AICH power offset
The default value of this parameter is -6, namely -6dB
z PICHPOWEROFFSET
Parameter name: PICH power offset
z AICHPOWEROFFSET
Parameter name: AICH power offset
Value Range： -22 to 5
Physical Value Range： -22 to 5 dB, step 1dB
Content: The offset between the AICH transmit power and PCPICH transmit
power.
Set this parameter through ADD CHPWROFFSET, query it through LST
CHPWROFFSET, and modify it through MOD AICHPWROFFSET
z PICHPOWEROFFSET
Parameter name: PICH power offset
Physical Value Range：-10 to 5 dB , step 1dB
Content: The offset between the PICH transmit power and PCPICH transmit
power.
Set this parameter through ADD CHPWROFFSET, query it through LST
CHPWROFFSET, and modify it through MOD PICHPWROFFSET
275
Contents
276
Contents

2.1 Open Loop Power Control Overview
2.2 PRACH Open Loop Power Control
2.3 Downlink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control
2.4 Uplink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control
277
Open Loop Power Control Overview
z Purpose
Calculate the initial transmission power of uplink / downlink channels
z Principle
Estimates the downlink signal power loss on propagation path
Path loss of the uplink channel is related to the downlink channel
z Application
Open loop power control is applied only at the beginning of connection
setup to set the initial power value.
z In downlink open loop power control, the initial transmission power is calculated
according to the downlink path loss between NodeB and UE.
z In uplink, since the uplink and downlink frequencies of WCDMA are in the same
frequency band, a significant correlation exists between the average path loss of the
two links. This make it possible for each UE to calculate the initial transmission power
required in the uplink based on the downlink path loss.
z However, there is 90MHz frequency interval between uplink and downlink frequencies,
the fading between the uplink and downlink is uncorrelated, so the open loop power
control is not absolutely accurate.
278
Contents

279
PRACH Open Loop Power Control
Serving
UE Node B RNC
1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request

RRC RRC
Allocate RNTI
Select L1 and L2
Open loop power parameters
2. Radio Link Setup Request
control of PRACH NBAP NBAP
Start RX
description
3. Radio Link Setup Response
NBAP NBAP
4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport Bearer Setup
5. Downlink Synchronization
DCH - FP DCH - FP
6. Uplink Synchronization
DCH - FP DCH - FP
Start TX
description
7. CCCH: RRC Connection Set up

RRC RRC
8. Radio Link Restore Indication
NBAP NBAP
9. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete

RRC RRC
z In access procedure, the first signaling “RRC CONNECTION REQUEST” is

transmitted in message part on PRACH.
z Before PRACH message part transmission, UE will transmit PRACH preamble, and
the transmission power of first preamble is calculated by this PRACH open loop power
control.
280
z Initial Power Calculation for the First Preamble

When UE needs to set up a RRC connection, the initial power
of uplink PRACH can be calculated according to the following
formula:
Preamble_I nitial_Pow er = PCPICH Transmit Power - CPICH_RSCP

+ UL Interferen ce + Constant Value For Calculatin g Initial Tx Power
z In this formula, where
PCPICH TRANSMIT POWER defines the PCPICH transmit power in a cell. It is

broadcast in SIB5.
CPICH_RSCP means received signal code power, the received power

measured on the PCPICH. The measurement is performed by the UE.
UL interference is the UL RTWP measured by the NodeB. It is broadcast in SIB7.
CONSTANT VALUE compensates for the RACH processing gain. It is broadcast

in SIB5.
z The initial value of PRACH power is set through open loop power control. UE operation
steps are as follows:
1. Read “Primary CPICH DL TX power”, “UL interference” and “Constant value”

from system information.
2. Measure the value of CPICH_RSCP;
3. Calculate the Preamble_Initial_Power of PRACH.
281
PRACH Open Loop Power Control Parameters
z CONSTANTVALUE
Parameter name: Constant value for calculating initial TX
power
z CONSTANTVALUE
Parameter name: Constant value for calculating initial TX power
Value range : -35 ~ -10
Physical Value Range：-35 to -10 dB
Content: It is used to calculate the transmit power of the first preamble in the
random access process.
Set this parameter through ADD PRACHBASIC, query it through LST PRACH,
and modify it through MOD PRACHUUPARAS
282
z Timing relationship of PRACH and AICH
1 access slot
Acq.
Ind.
AICH
τ p-a
Pre- Pre- Message

amble amble part
PRACH
τ p-p τ p-m
z After UE transmit the first Preamble on PRACH, it will wait for the corresponding AI
(Acquisition Indicator) on the AICH. The timing relationship of PRACH and AICH is
shown in above figure.
z There will be 3 parameters used to define the timing relationship:
τp-p: time interval between two PRACH preambles. τp-p is not a fixed value, it is
decided by selecting access slot of PRACH preambles,
Here τp-p has one restriction, it must be longer than a minimum value τp-p min ,
namely τp-p ≥ τp-p min.
τp-a: time interval between PRACH preamble and AICH Acquisition Indicator. If
UE sends the PRACH preamble, it will detect the responding AI after τp-a time.
τp-m: time interval between PRACH preamble and PRACH message part. If UE
sends the PRACH preamble and receives positive AI from the AICH, it will send
the message part after τp-m time.
283
z AICHTXTIMING
Parameter name: AICH transmission timing
Content:
When AICHTXTIMING = 0,
τp-p,min = 15360 chips, τp-a = 7680 chips, τp-m = 15360 chips

The recommended value is 1
z Parameter AICHTXTIMING is used to define the set of τp-p min, τp-a, τp-m.
z AICHTXTIMING
Parameter name: AICH transmission timing
Value range：0,1
Content:
Set this parameter through ADD AICH, query it through LST AICH, and modify it
needs de-activated the cell through DEA CELL. After the old configuration of
AICH is deleted through RMV AICH , a new AICH can be established through
ADD AICH
284
z Power Ramping for Preamble Retransmission
Power Offset Pp-m
Power Ramp Step
Pre-
Pre- …… amble Message
Pre- amble part
Preamble_Initial Pre- amble
_Power amble
＃1 ＃2 ＃3 ＃N
z After UE transmit the first Preamble,
If no positive or negative AI on AICH is received after τp-a time,

UE shall increase the preamble power by POWER RAMP STEP, and
retransmit the preamble.
This ramping process stops until the number of transmitted preambles has
reached the MAX PREAMBLE RETRANSMISSION within an access cycle,
or when the maximum number of access cycles has reached MAX
PREAMBLE LOOP.
If a negative AI on AICH is received by the UE after τp-a time,

which indicates rejection of the preamble, the UE shall wait for a certain
“Back-off Delay” and re-initiate a new random access process.
When a positive AI on AICH is received by UE after τp-a time,

it will transmit the random access message after the uplink access slot of
the last preamble.
The transmit power of the random access message control part should be
POWER OFFSET higher than the power of the last transmitted preamble.
285
z POWERRAMPSTEP
Parameter name: Power increase step
z PREAMBLERETRANSMAX
Parameter name: Max preamble retransmission
The Recommended value is 20
z POWERRAMPSTEP
Parameter name: Power increase step
Value range : 1 to 8
Physical Value Range: 1 to 8 dB
Content: The power increase step of the random access preambles transmitted
before the UE receives the acquisition indicator in the random access process.
z PREAMBLERETRANSMAX
Parameter name: Max preamble retransmission
Content: The maximum number of preambles transmitted in a preamble ramping

cycle.
286
z MMAX
Parameter name: Max preamble loop
The recommended value is 8
z NB01MIN / NB01MAX
Parameter name: Random back-off lower / upper limit
The recommended value: 0 for both NB01MIN / NB01MAX
z MMAX
Parameter name: Max preamble loop
Value range: 1 to 32
Content: The maximum number of random access preamble loops.
Set this parameter through ADD RACH, query it through LST RACH, and modify
it first de-activated the cell through DEA CELL, then MOD RACH.
z NB01MIN / NB01MAX
Parameter name: Random back-off lower / upper limit
Content: The lower / upper limit of random access back-off delay.
The recommended value: 0 for both NB01MIN / NB01MAX
Set this parameter through ADD RACH, query it through LST RACH, and modify
it first de-activated the cell through DEA CELL, then MOD RACH.
287
z POWEROFFSETPPM
Parameter name: Power offset
The default value:
-3dB for signalling transmission;
-2dB for service transmission.
z POWEROFFSETPPM
Parameter name: Power offset
Value range: -5 to 10dB
Content: The power offset between the last access preamble and the message
control part. The power of the message control part can be obtained by adding
the offset to the access preamble power.
The recommended value of this parameter is -3dB for signalling transmission ,

and that -2dB for service transmission
Set this parameter through ADD PRACHTFC, query it through LST PRACH, and
modify it de-activated the cell through DEA CELL . After the old configuration of
PRACH is deleted through RMV PRACHTFC , a new parameters can be
established through ADD PRACHTFC
z The PRACH message also consists of control part and data part, here the POWER
OFFSET is the difference between the PRACH preamble and the message control part.
z The PRACH message uses GAIN FACTOR to set the power of control / data part:
GAIN FACTOR BETAC ( βc ) is the gain factor for the control part.
GAIN FACTOR BETAD ( βd ) is the gain factor for the data part.
288
Contents

289
DL DPDCH Open Loop Power Control
Serving
UE Node B
RNC

RRC RRC
Allocate RNTI
Select L1 and L2
parameters
NBAP NBAP
Start RX
description
NBAP NBAP
DL DPDCH Open DCH - FP DCH - FP
Loop Power Control DCH - FP
DCH - FP
Start TX
description

RRC RRC
NBAP NBAP

RRC RRC
z According to the RRC connection establishment procedure, after RNC received the
“RRC CONNECTION REQUEST” message, and NodeB set up the radio link for UE,
then Iub interface resources is established between NodeB and RNC.
z When DCH-FP of Iub interface finished downlink and uplink synchronization, the
downlink DPCH starts to transmit, and DPDCH initial transmission power is calculated
through open loop power control.
290
z When a dedicated channel is set up, the initial power of

downlink DPDCH can be calculated according to the
following formula:
R Eb ⎛ PCPICH ⎞
PInitial = ×( )DL × ⎜⎜ − αPTotal ⎟⎟
W No ⎝ ( Ec / No )CPICH ⎠
z In this formula, where
R is the requested data bitrate by the user
W is the chip rate
(Eb/No)DL is the Eb/No target to ensure the service quality. RNC searches for
the (Eb/No)DL dynamically in a set of pre-defined values according to specific cell
environment type, coding type, bitrate, BLER target and etc.
(Ec/Io)CPICH is the CPICH signal quality measured by UE, then it is sent to RNC
through RACH.
α is the orthogonality factor in the downlink. In Huawei implementation, α is set

to 0.
Ptotal is the total carrier transmit power measured at the NodeB
z The initial transmission power of downlink DPDCH could be calculated through this
formula, then, initial transmission power of downlink DPCCH can be obtained
according to the power offset: PO1, PO2 and PO3.
291
1 timeslot
Downlink
Transmit
Power PO2
PO1
PO3
Data1 TPC TFCI Data2 Pilot
DPDCH DPCCH DPDCH DPCCH
z This figure shows the power offset of downlink DPCH :
PO1 is the power offset of DPCCH TFCI bits to DPDCH data bits.
PO2 is the power offset of DPCCH TPC bits to DPDCH data bits.
PO3 is the power offset of DPCCH Pilot bits to DPDCH data bits.
The values of PO1, PO2 and PO3 are configured on RNC.
292
DL DPDCH Open Loop Power Control Parameter
z TFCIPO
Parameter name: TFCI power offset
z TPCPO
Parameter name: TPC power offset
z TFCIPO
Parameter name: TFCI power offset
Physical value range: 0 to 6 dB, step: 0.25
Content: The offset of TFCI bit transmit power from data bit transmit power in
each time slot of radio frames on DL DPCH
Set this parameter through SET FRC, query it through LST FRC, and modify it
through SET FRC
z TPCPO
Parameter name: TPC power offset
Content: The offset of TPC bit transmit power from data bit transmit power in
through SET FRC
293
DL DPDCH Open Loop Power Control Parameter
z PILOTPO
Parameter name: Pilot power offset
z PILOTPO
Parameter name: Pilot power offset
Content: The offset of pilot bit transmit power from data bit transmit power in
through SET FRC
294
Downlink Power Control Restriction
z The power of downlink dedicated channel is limited by an
upper and lower limit for each radio link.
The DL DPDCH power could not exceed Maximum_DL_Power,
nor could it be below Minimum_DL_Power.
z RLMAXDLPWR / RLMINDLPWR
Parameter name: RL Max / Min DL TX power
The recommended value is shown in the following table.
z Note: Both downlink open loop and close loop power control will be limited by this parameter.
z RLMAXDLPWR
Parameter name: RL Max DL TX power
Content: The maximum downlink transmit power of radio link. This parameter should
fulfill the coverage requirement of the network planning, and the value is relative to
[PCPICH transmit power]
Set this parameter through ADD CELLRLPWR , query it through LST CELLRLPWR, and
modify it through MOD CELLRLPWR
z RLMINDLPWR
Parameter name: RL Min DL TX power
Content: The minimum downlink transmit power of radio link. This parameter should
consider the maximum downlink transmit power and the dynamic range of power control,
and the value is relative to [PCPICH transmit power].
Since the dynamic range of power control is set as 15dB, this parameter is
recommended as [RL Max DL TX power] – 15 dB.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLRLPWR, query it through LST CELLRLPWR, and
modify it through MOD CELLRLPWR
295
Downlink Power Restriction Parameters
z Referential configurations for typical services:

RL Max Downlink RL Min Downlink
Service Downlink SF
Transmit Power Transmit Power
CS Domain
12.2 kbps AMR -3 -18 128
28 kbps -2 -17 64
32 kbps -2 -17 64
56 kbps 0 -15 32
64 kbps 0 -15 32
PS Domain
8 kbps -8 -23 128
32 kbps -4 -19 64
64 kbps -2 -17 32
144 kbps 0 -15 16
256 kbps 2 -13 8
384 kbps 4 -11 8
296
Contents

297
UL DPCCH Open Loop Power Control
Serving
UE Node B
RNC

RRC RRC
Allocate RNTI
Select L1 and L2
parameters
NBAP NBAP
Start RX
description
NBAP NBAP
DCH - FP DCH - FP
DCH - FP DCH - FP
Start TX
description

RRC RRC
Open Loop Power NBAP NBAP
Control of UL DPCCH
RRC RRC
z According to the RRC connection establishment procedure, after RNC sent the “RRC
CONNECTION SETUP” message, UE will try to synchronize with NodeB, and the
uplink DPCCH starts to transmit, here DPCCH initial transmission power is calculated
through open loop power control
298
UL DPCCH Open Loop Power Control
z The initial power of the uplink DPCCH can be calculated
according to the following formula:
DPCCH _ Initial _ Power = DPCCH _ Power _ Offset − CPICH _ RSCP
z Where
CPICH_RSCP means the received signal code power, the received
power measured on the CPICH.
DPCCH_Power_Offset is provided by RNC to the UE via RRC
signaling.
z For Huawei, DPCCH_Power_Offset is calculated with the following formula:
DPCCH _ Power _ Offset = PCPICH Transmit Power + UL Interference

+ Default Cons tan t Value
z Where
PCPICH Transmit Power defines the PCPICH transmit power in a cell.
UL Interference is the UL RTWP measured by the NodeB.
Default Constant Value reflects the target Ec/No of the uplink DPCCH
preamble.
299
UL DPCCH Open Loop Power Control Parameter
z DEFAULTCONSTANTVALUE
Parameter name: Constant value configured by default
The recommended value is -27, namely -27dB.
z DEFAULTCONSTANTVALUE
Parameter name: Constant value configured by default
Value range : -35 to -10 , unit :dB
Content: This parameter is used to obtain DPCCH_Power_Offset, which is used

by UE to calculate the initial transmit power of UL DPCCH during the open loop
power control process.
through SET FRC
300
Uplink Power Control Restriction
z During the operation of uplink power control, the UE
transmit power shall not exceed the Maximum Allowed
Uplink Transmit Power.
The recommended value is 21, namely 21 dBm.
Value range: -50 to 33
Physical value range: -50 to 33 dBm. Step: 1
Content: The maximum allowed uplink transmit power of a UE in the cell, which
is related to the network planning.

CELLSELRESEL, and modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL
301
Uplink Power Control Restriction
z In addition, there are four parameters which correspond to the maximum
allowed transmit power of four classes of services respectively:
z MAXULTXPOWERFORCONV
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Conversational service
z MAXULTXPOWERFORSTR
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Streaming service
z MAXULTXPOWERFORINT
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Interactive service
z MAXULTXPOWERFORBAC
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Background service
The recommended value is 24, namely 24 dBm.
z MAXULTXPOWERFORCONV
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Conversational service
z MAXULTXPOWERFORSTR
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Streaming service
z MAXULTXPOWERFORINT
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Interactive service
z MAXULTXPOWERFORBAC
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Background service
Physical value range: -50 to 33 dBm. Step: 1
Content: The maximum UL transmit power for specific service in the cell, which
is related to the network planning.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC,
and modify it through MOD CELLCAC
302
Contents
303
Contents

3.1 Closed Loop Power Control Overview
3.2 Uplink Inner Loop Power Control
3.3 Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
3.4 Outer Loop Power Control
304
Closed Loop Power Control Overview
z Why closed loop power control is needed?
Open loop power control is not accurate enough, it can only
estimate the initial transmission power.
Closed loop power control can guarantee the QoS with
minimum power. By decreasing the interference, the system
capacity will be increased.
Outer Loop Inner Loop

BLERmea>BLERtar→SIRtar SIRmea>SIRtar→ TPC=0
SIRtar TPC
BLERtar BLER <BLER →SIR SIRmea<SIRtar→ TPC=1 TPC=1 Power
mea tar tar
TPC=0 Power
Until Until
BLERmea=BLERtar SIRmea=SIRtar
Inner Loop Power Control
z The receiver compares SIRmea (measured SIR) with SIRtar (target SIR), and decide the TPC to
send.
If SIRmea is greater than SIRtar, the TPC is set as “0” to increase transmission power
If SIRmea is less than SIRtar, the TPC is set as “1” to decrease transmission power
z TPC is sent to the transmitter in DPCCH, the transmitter will adjust the power according to the
value of received TPC.
z Through inner loop power control, the SIRmea can be ensured to approach SIRtar.
Outer Loop Power Control
z The receiver compares BLERmea (measured BLER) with BLERtar (target BLER), and decide how
to set the SIRtar.
If BLERmea is greater than BLERtar, the SIRtar is increased
If BLERmea is less than BLERtar, the SIRtar is decreased
z The adjusted SIRtar is sent for the inner loop power control, then it will be used in previous
process to guide the transmitter power adjustment.
z Through outer loop power control, the BLERmea can be ensured to approach BLERtar.
305
Contents

306
Uplink Inner Loop Power Control
z NodeB compares the measured SIR to the preset target SIR, then derives
TPC and sends the TPC Decision to UE.
TPC Decision
Compare SIRmea with SIRtar ( 0, 1 )
SIRmea > SIRtar → TPC = 0 Single RL / Soft HO
SIRmea ≤ SIRtar → TPC = 1 PCA1 / PCA2
Inner Loop Generate TPC_cmd

( -1, 0, 1 )
Set SIRtar Adjust DPCCH Tx

Transmit TPC △DPCCH =△TPC×TPC_cmd
NodeB UE
Adjust DPDCH Tx
( βc , β d )
z RNC sends SIRtar (target SIR) to NodeB and then NodeB compares SIRmea (measured
SIR) with SIRtar once every timeslot.
If the estimated SIR is greater than the target SIR, NodeB sends TPC “0” to UE
on downlink DPCCH TPC field.
Otherwise, NodeB sends TPC “1” to UE.
z After reception of one or more TPC in a slot, UE shall derive a single TPC_cmd (TPC
command, with value among -1,0,1):
For UE is in soft handover state, more than one TPC is received in a slot, so
firstly multiple TPC_cmd is combined.
Two algorithms could be used by the UE for deriving the TPC_cmd, those are
PCA1 and PCA2 (PCA means Power Control Algorithm).
z When deriving the combined TPC_cmd, UE shall adjust the transmit power of uplink
DPCCH with a step “UL Closed Loop Power Control Step Size“, as following:
△DPCCH =△TPC×TPC_cmd
z This adjustment is executed on the DPCCH, then associated DPDCH transmit power
is calculated according to DPDCH / DPCCH power ratio βd / βc.
307
Uplink Inner Loop PCA1 with Single Radio Link
z For single radio link and PCA1, UE derives one TPC_cmd in each
time slot as follows:
TPC …… 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 ……
TPC_cmd …… -1 1 1 -1 1 1 -1 1 1 -1 ……
This control is performed in each time slot, so

the power control frequency is 1500Hz
z When UE has single radio link, only one TPC will be received in each slot. In this case,
the value of TPC_cmd shall be derived by PCA1 as follows:
If the received TPC is equal to 0, then TPC_cmd for that slot is –1.
If the received TPC is equal to 1, then TPC_cmd for that slot is 1.
z According to DPCCH channel structure, there are 15 time slots in a 10ms radio frame,
and the control is performed once in each time slot, so the frequency of uplink inner
loop PCA1 is 1500Hz.
308
Uplink Inner Loop PCA2 with Single Radio Link
z For single radio link and PCA2, UE derives one TPC_cmd in each
5-slot group as follows:
10ms radio frame
TPC Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8 TS9 TS10 TS11 TS12 TS13 TS14 ……
……
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
…… ……
0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
TPC_cmd
This control is performed in each 5-slot group,

so the power control frequency is 300Hz
z When UE has single radio link, only one TPC will be received in each slot. In this case,
the value of TPC_cmd shall be derived by PCA2 as follows:
For the first 4 slots of a set, TPC_cmd = 0.
For the fifth slot of a set, UE make the decisions on as follows:

If all 5 TPC within a group are 1, then TPC_cmd = 1 in the 5th slot.
If all 5 TPC within a group are 0, then TPC_cmd = -1 in the 5th slot.
Otherwise, TPC_cmd = 0 in the 5th slot.
z According to DPCCH channel structure, there are 15 time slots in a 10ms radio frame,
and the control is performed once in each 5-slot group, so the frequency of uplink inner
loop PCA2 is 500Hz.
309
Uplink Inner Loop with Soft Handover
z When UE enters soft handover state, on the NodeB side,

there are two phases :
Uplink synchronization phase
Multi-radio link phase
z On UE side, UE will receive different TPCs from different

RLS in one time slot. Therefore, the UE should combine all
the TPCs to get a unique TPC_CMD.
z On the NodeB side, there are two phases during the soft handover state:
Uplink synchronization phase
The NodeB should send durative “TPC = 1” to the newly-added RL before

successful synchronization.
Multi-radio link phase
Each NodeB and each cell will estimate the SIR individually and the general
TPC individually. Therefore, the UE may receive different TPC from different
RLS.
z Especially, when UE is in softer handover state, it means UE has radio links to the
same NodeB, in this case, these RLs (Radio Link) belong to the same RLS (Radio Link
Set), and the all TPCs are the same from each RL.
310
Uplink Inner Loop PCA1 with Soft Handover
CELL1 CELL2
For each slot, combine TPC from
the same RLS, then get Wi RL1-1 RL1-2
RLS1
Get TPC_cmd based on RLS2 RLS3

TPC_cmd = γ (W1, W2, … WN)
CELL3 CELL4
RLS1-TPC (W1) …… 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 ……
RLS2-TPC (W2) …… 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 ……
RLS3-TPC (W3) …… 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 ……
TPC_cmd …… -1 -1 1 -1 -1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 ……
z When UE is in soft handover state, multiple TPC will be received in each slot from
different cells in the active set. UE will generate the TPC_cmd by PCA1 as follows:
z 1. Combine the TPC from the same RLS and derive the Wi
When the RLs (Radio Link) are in the same RLS (Radio Link Set), they will
transmit the same TPC in a slot. In this case, the TPCs from the same RLS shall
be combined into one.
After combination, UE will obtain a soft symbol decision Wi for each RLSi.
z 2. Combine the TPC from different RLSs and derive the TPC_cmd
UE derives TPC_cmd, it is based on a function γ and all the N soft symbol

decisions Wi:
TPC_cmd = γ (W1, W2, … WN),
Where TPC_cmd can only take the values 1 or -1.
In Huawei implementation, the function γ shall fulfil the following criteria:
If the TPCs from all RLSs are “1”, the output of γ shall be equal to “1” ;
If one TPC from any RLS is “0”, the output of γ shall be equal to “-1”.
311
Combine TPC from same RLS

in each time slot
CELL1 CELL2
RL1-1 RL1-2
Calculate TPC_tempi for each RLSi RLS1
Calculate TPC_cmd RLS2 RLS3

If any TPC_tempi = -1, TPC_cmd = -1
N CELL3 CELL4
1
If
N
∑ TPC _ temp i > 0.5 , TPC_cmd = 1
i =1
Otherwise, TPC_cmd = 0
z When UE is in soft handover state, multiple TPC will be received in each slot from
different cells in the active set. UE will generate the TPC_cmd by PCA2 as follows:
z 1. Combine the TPC from the same RLS.
When the RLs are in the same RLS, they will transmit the same TPC in a slot. In
this case, the TPCs from the same RLS shall be combined into one.
z 2. Calculate the TPC_tempi for each RLS
UE derives TPC_tempi through the same way in the last slide, as follows:
For the first 4 slots of a group, TPC_tempi = 0.
For the 5th slot of a group:
If all 5 TPCs within a group are 1, then TPC_tempi = 1 in the 5th slot.
If all 5 TPCs within a group are 0, then TPC_tempi = -1 in the 5th slot.
Otherwise, TPC_tempi = 0 in the 5th slot.
z 3. Calculate the TPC_cmd
UE derives TPC_cmd through the following criteria:
If any TPC_tempi is equal to -1, TPC_cmd is set to -1.

N
∑ TPC _ temp
1
If i > 0.5 , TPC_cmd = 1
N i =1
Otherwise, TPC_cmd = 0
312
10ms/frame
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
TPC
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8 TS9 TS10 TS11 TS12 TS13 TS14
RLS1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
…… ……
RLS2 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
RLS3 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
TPC_tempi
RLS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0
…… ……
RLS2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0
RLS3 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 1
TPC_cmd
…… ……
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0
z The example of the uplink inner loop PCA2 in soft handover state.
313
Uplink Inner Loop Power Control Parameters
z PWRCTRLALG
Parameter name: Power control algorithm selection
The recommended value is ALGORITHM1
z ULTPCSTEPSIZE
Parameter name: UL closed loop power control step size
z PWRCTRLALG
Parameter name: Power control algorithm selection
Value range: ALGORITHM1, ALGORITHM2
Content: This parameter is used to inform the UE of the method for translating
the received TPC commands.
Recommended value: ALGORITHM1
through SET FRC
z ULTPCSTEPSIZE
Parameter name: UL closed loop power control step size
Value range :1dB, 2dB
Content: The step size of the closed loop power control performed on UL
DPDCH. This parameter is mandatory when the parameter “Power control
algorithm selection” is set as "ALGORITHM1".
through SET FRC
314
Contents

315
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
z UE L1 compares the measured SIR to the preset target SIR, then derives
TPC and sends the TPC Decision to NodeB.
L3 Set SIRtar
Derive TPCest(k)
( 0, 1 )
DPC_MODE
Inner Loop
Generate PTPC(k) L1 compare
SIRmea with
SIRtar
Calculate P(k) Derive and transmit

NodeB TPC based on UE
DPC_MODE
Adjust DPCH Tx Power
z Basically the downlink inner loop power control process is similar with uplink, UE L3
sends SIRtar to UE L1 and then UE L1 compares SIRmea with SIRtar :
If the SIRmea is greater than the SIRtar , UE sends TPC “0” to NodeB on uplink
DPCCH TPC field.
Otherwise, UE sends TPC “1” to NodeB.
z The UE shall check the downlink power control mode before generating the TPC, two
algorithm DPC_MODE1 and DPC_MODE2 could be used by UE to derive the TPC.
Upon receiving the TPC, NodeB shall estimate the transmitted TPC and adjust its
downlink DPCCH/DPDCH power accordingly.
z After reception of one or more TPC in a slot, NodeB shall derive the estimated TPC
TPCest(k) and calculate a PTPC(k), the power adjustment of k:th slot.
z Then NodeB shall adjust the current downlink power P(k-1) to a new power P(k), and
adjust the power of the DPCCH and DPDCH with the same amount, since power
difference between them is fixed.
316
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control Mode
z Two DPC_MODE (Downlink Power Control Mode) could be

used:
If DPC_MODE = 0, UE sends a unique TPC in each slot,
UTRAN shall derive TPCest to be 0 or 1, and update the power
every slot;
If DPC_MODE = 1, UE repeats the same TPC over 3 slots,

UTRAN shall derive TPCest over three slots to be 0 or 1, and
update the power every three slots.
z The DPC_MODE parameter is a UE specific parameter and controlled by the UTRAN.
z The UE shall check the DPC_MODE (Downlink Power Control Mode) before
generating the TPC, and upon receiving the TPC, the UTRAN shall adjust its downlink
power accordingly.
317
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control Parameters
z DPCMODE
Parameter name: Downlink power control mode
The recommended value is SINGLE_TPC, namely

DPC_MODE = 0
z DPCMODE
Parameter name: Downlink power control mode
Value range: SINGLE_TPC (DPC_MODE=0), TPC_TRIPLET_IN_SOFT

(DPC_MODE=1), TPC_AUTO_ADJUST
Content:
SIGNLE_TPC, a fast power control mode, indicates that a unique TPC

command is sent in each time slot on DPCCH.
TPC_TRIPLET_IN_SOFT, a slow power control mode, indicates that the same

TPC is sent in three time slots, it is applicable to soft handover and it can
decrease the power deviation.
TPC_AUTO_ADJUST, an automatically adjusted mode, indicates that the value

of DPC_MODE can be modified by sending the message “ACTIVE SET
UPDATE” to UE.
Recommended value: SINGLE_TPC
through SET FRC
318
z After estimating the TPC, the UTRAN shall set the downlink power
to P(k) for k:th slot according to the following formula:
P ( k ) = P ( k − 1 ) + PTPC ( k ) + Pbal ( k )
Where
P(k-1) is downlink transmission power in (k-1):th slot
PTPC(k) is the adjustment of downlink power in k:th slot
Pbal (k) is correction value according to the downlink power balance

procedure. For a single radio link, Pbal (k) equals 0.
z If DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH is OFF, then Pbal(k) equals 0.
319
z PTPC(k) is calculated according to the following:

If the value of “Limited Power Increase Used” parameter is “Not
Used” , then:
⎧+ Δ if TPC est ( k ) = 1
PTPC ( k ) = ⎨ TPC
⎩ − ΔTPC if TPC est ( k ) = 0
Where
TPCest (k) is uplink received TPC of the k:th slot
ΔTPC is downlink power adjustment step size
320
If the value of “Limited Power Increase Used” parameter is
“Used” , then:
⎧+ ΔTPC if TPCest ( k ) = 1 and Δsum ( k ) + ΔTPC < Power _ Raise _ Limit

⎪
PTPC ( k ) = ⎨0 if TPCest ( k ) = 1 and Δsum ( k ) + ΔTPC ≥ Power _ Raise _ Limit
⎪− Δ if TPCest ( k ) = 0
⎩ TPC
k −1
Where Δsum ( k ) = ∑ PTPC ( i )
i = k − DL _ Power _ Average _ Window_ Size
Where,
z Power_Raise_Limit : the restriction value of power increasing within a period
z DL_Power_Average_Window_Size : the period of DL transmit power increasing.
z From the definition above, Δsum(k) indicates the sum of downlink power adjustment in
the latest DL_Power_Average_Window_Size time slots.
321
z INNER_LOOP_DL_LMTED_PWR_INC_SWITCH
This is one switch in PCSWITCH (Power control algorithm
switch) parameter.
The default value is 0, namely OFF.
z POWERRAISELIMIT
Parameter name: Power increase limit
The recommended value is 10dB
z INNER_LOOP_DL_LMTED_PWR_INC_SWITCH
This is one switch in PcSwitch (Power control algorithm switch) parameter.
Value range：1 (ON) , 0 (OFF)
Content: When it is checked, limited power increase algorithm is applied in the
inner loop power control. limited power increase algorithm means that when the
DL transmit power is increased, there is a limit for the step, that is, each increase
is limited.
Recommended value (default value): 0
Set this parameter through SET CORRMALGOSWITCH, query it through LST
CORRMALGOSWITCH, and modify it through SET CORRMALGOSWITCH
z POWERRAISELIMIT
Parameter name: Power increase limit
Value range: 0 to 10 dB
Content: The increase of DL transmit power within
DL_Power_Average_Window_Size cannot exceed this parameter value.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP, query it through LST CELL, and
modify it through MOD CELLSETUP
322
z DLPOWERAVERAGEWINDOWSIZE
Parameter name: DL power average window size
The recommended value is 20 time slots
z FDDTPCDLSTEPSIZE
Parameter name: FDD DL power control step size
The recommended value is STEPSIZE_1DB, namely 1dB
z DLPOWERAVERAGEWINDOWSIZE
Parameter name: DL power average window size
Value range: 1 to 60 time slots
Content: UTRAN calculates the increase of DL transmit power within the period defined
via this parameter to determine whether the increase exceeds “Power Raise Limit”. If so,
UTRAN will not increase the power even when it receives the command to raise the
power
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP, query it through LST CELL ,and modify it
through MOD CELLSETUP
z FDDTPCDLSTEPSIZE
Parameter name: FDD DL power control step size
Value range: STEPSIZE_0.5DB, STEPSIZE_1DB, STEPSIZE_1.5DB, STEPSIZE_2DB
Physical value range: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2 dB
Content: The step size of the closed loop power control performed on DL DPCH in
Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) mode.
Recommended value: STEPSIZE_1DB
Set this parameter through SET FRC, query it through LST FRC, and modify it through
SET FRC
323
Downlink Power Balance
z Purpose
Monitor the
The purpose of this procedure is to Tx power of
NodeBs and
balance the DL transmission powers of start the DPB
more than one Radio Links. process
z The start and stop of DPB

The power offset of two RLs is greater
than the DPB start threshold, the DPB
NodeB NodeB
process is started
The power offset of two RLs is less
than the DPB stop threshold, the DPB
process is stopped DPB process
z During soft handover, the UL TPC is demodulated in each RLS, then due to
demodulation errors, the DL transmit power of the each branch in soft handover will
drift separately, which causes loss to the macro-diversity gain.
z The DL Power Balance (DPB) algorithm is introduced to reduce the power drift
between links during the soft handover.
324
Downlink Power Balance Parameters
z DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH
This is one switch in PCSWITCH (Power control algorithm switch)
parameter.
The default value is 0, namely OFF.
z DPBSTARTTHD / DPBSTOPTHD
Parameter name: DPB start threshold / DPB stop threshold
The recommended value:
DPB start threshold 8, namely 4dB;
DPB stop threshold 4, namely 2dB.
z DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH
This is one switch in PcSwitch (Power control algorithm switch) parameter.
Content: When it is checked, Downlink Power Balance (DPB) algorithm is applied to RNC.
Downlink power drift among different RLs, which is caused by TPC bit error or other
reasons, could reduce the gain of soft handover. DPB is mainly used to balance the
downlink power of different RLs for an UE in order to achieve the best gain of soft
handover.
Recommended value (default value): 0
z DPBSTARTTHD / DPBSTOPTHD
Parameter name: DPB start threshold / DPB stop threshold
Value range: 0~255
Physical value range: 0~127.5dB; step: 0.5
Content: The threshold of start / stop DL power balancing in soft handover. When the
difference of the power values of every two paths is greater / smaller than or equal to this
threshold in soft handover, the RNC shall start / stop DL power balancing; otherwise,
shall not.
The recommended value is DPB start threshold 8, namely 4dB; DPB stop threshold 4,
namely 2dB;
Set this parameter through SET DPB, query it through LST DPB and modify it through
SET DPB
325
Contents

326
Outer Loop Power Control
z Why we need outer loop power control?
Different curves
correspond to
different multi-path
environment
BLER
SIR
z The reason of outer loop power control
The QoS which NAS provides to CN is BLER, not SIR
z The relationship between inner loop power control and outer loop power control
SIRtar should be satisfied with the requirement of decoding correctly. But

different multi-path radio environments request different SIR
Therefore, the outer loop power control can adjust the SIR to get a stable BLER
in the changeable radio environment
327
Uplink Outer Loop Power Control
Measure BLER of received Measure SIR and

data and compare with the compare with SIRtar
BLERtar
Out loop Inner loop
Set BLERtar
Set SIRtar Transmit TPC
RNC NodeB UE
z Uplink outer-loop power control is performed in the SRNC. The SRNC measures the
received BLER and compares it with the BLERtar. If the BLERmea is greater than the
BLERtar, the SRNC increases the SIRtar; otherwise, the SRNC decreases the SIRtar.
328
z SIRtar Adjustment
⎡ BLER meas ,i ( n − 1 ) − BLER tar ,i ⎤

SIRtar ( n ) = MAX ⎢ SIRtar ( n − 1 ) + × Step i × Factor ⎥
⎣⎢ BLER tar ,i ⎦⎥
Where
i is the i:th transmission channel.
n is the n:th adjustment period.
z According to the formula above,
SIRtar(n) is the target SIR used for the n:th adjustment period.
MAX means the maximum value among the total i transmission channels.
BLERmeas,i (n) is measured for the i:th transmission channel in the n:th
adjustment period.
BLERtar,i is the target BLER of the i:th transmission channel.
Stepi is the adjustment step of the i:th transmission channel.
Factor is the adjustment factor.
329
Uplink Outer Loop Power Control Parameters
z OPLC_SWITCH
This is one switch in PCSWITCH (Power control algorithm
switch) parameter.
The default value is 1, namely ON
z INITSIRTARGET
Parameter name: Initial SIR target value
The recommended value is shown in following table.
z OPLC_SWITCH
This is one switch in PCSWITCH (Power control algorithm switch) parameter.
Comments: When it is checked, RNC updates the uplink SIR TARGET of RLs
on the NodeB side by Iub DCH FP signals
Default value: 1

z INITSIRTARGET
Parameter name: Initial SIR target value
Physical value range: -8.2 to +17.3 dB, step 0.1
Content: Defining the initial SIR target value of outer loop power control.
Recommended value: refer to the following table.
Set this parameter through ADD TYPSRBOLPC / ADD TYPRABOLPC, query it

through LST TYPSRB / LST TYPRAB, and modify it through MOD
TYPSRBOLPC / MOD TYPRABOLPC
330
z SIRADJUSTPERIOD
Parameter name: OLPC adjustment period
z SIRADJUSTFACTOR
Parameter name: SIR adjustment coefficient
The recommended value is 10, namely 1
z SIRADJUSTPERIOD
Parameter name: OLPC adjustment period.
Physical value range: 10 to 1000 ms, step 10
Comments: Outer loop power control varies with radio environment. A fast
changing radio environment leads to a shorter outer loop power control
adjustment period, while a slower changing one makes the period longer.
Default value: 40
z SIRADJUSTFACTOR
Parameter name: SIR adjustment coefficient
Physical value range: 0.1 to 1 , step: 0.1
Content: It is used to adjust the best OLPC step for different cells when the
OLPC algorithm is given.
Recommended value: 10, namely 1
Set this parameter through SET OPLC / ADD CELLOLPC, query it through LST
OPLC, and modify it through SET OPLC / MOD CELLOLPC
331
z BLERQUALITY
Parameter name: Service DCH_BLER target value
z SIRADJUSTSTEP
Parameter name: SIR adjustment step
The recommended value is shown in the following table.
z SIRADJUSTSTEP
Parameter name: SIR adjustment step
Physical value range: 0 to 10 , step: 0.001dB
Content: Step of target SIR adjustment in outer loop power control algorithm.
through LST TYPSRB / LST TYPRAB ,and modify it through MOD
z BLERQUALITY
Parameter name: Service DCH_BLER target value
Physical value range: 5×10-7 to 1
Content: This QoS-related parameter is used by CRNC to decide the target SIR
value that influences access and power control. Use the formula below to get the
integer value of the parameter: 10×Log 10(BLER).
332
SRB SRB AMR CSD PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B
Service
3.4k 13.6k 12.2k 64k 8k 16k 32k 64k 128k 144k 256k 384k
SIR init
102 122 102 122 102 102 102 102 102 107 122 142
target value
OLPC
adjustment 4 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
period
Service
DCH_BLER -20 -20 -20 -27 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
target value
SIR
adjustment 4 10 5 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
step
z Where,
CSD: CS domain Data service
I/B: Interactive and Background.
333
z The parameters MaxSirStepUp and MaxSirStepDown limit the
adjustment range of the SIRtar , and the algorithm is:
If ΔSIRtar > 0 and ΔSIRtar > “MaxSirStepUp” ,
then SIRtar (n+1) = SIRtar (n) + MaxSirStepUp
If ΔSIRtar < 0 and ABS( ΔSIRtar ) > “MaxSirStepDown” ,
then SIRtar (n+1) = SIRtar (n) – MaxSirStepDown
z The parameters MaxSirtarget and MinSirtarget limit the range of

the SIRtar at any time.
z Where,
ΔSIRtar is the adjustment of SIRtar, and ΔSIRtar = SIRtar (n+1) - SIRtar (n)
ABS( ΔSIRtar ) means absolute value of ΔSIRtar
334
z MAXSIRSTEPUP / MAXSIRSTEPDN
Parameter name: Maximum SIR increase / decrease step
z MAXSIRTARGET / MINSIRTARGET
Parameter name: Maximum / Minimum SIR target
z MAXSIRSTEPUP / MAXSIRSTEPDN
Parameter name: Maximum SIR increase / decrease step
Content: Maximum allowed SIR increase/ decrease step within an outer loop
power control adjustment period.
z MAXSIRTARGET / MINSIRTARGET
Parameter name: Maximum / Minimum SIR target
Physical value range: -8.2 to17.3 dB, step: 0.1
Content: Define the maximum /minimum SIR target value of outer loop power
control algorithm.
335
SRB SRB AMR CSD PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B PS I/B
Service
3.4k 13.6k 12.2k 64k 8k 16k 32k 64k 128k 144k 256k 384k
Maximum
SIR increase 400 500 500 1000 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
step
Maximum
SIR decrease 200 200 200 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
step
Maximum
132 132 132 152 132 132 132 132 132 137 152 172
SIR target
Minimum SIR
62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62
target
z Where,
CSD: CS domain Data service
I/B: Interactive and Background.
336
Downlink Outer Loop Power Control
Measure BLER of
L3 received data and
compare with the
BLERtar
Outer loop
set SIRtar
Inner loop
L1 Measure SIR and

compare with SIRtar
Transmit TPC
NodeB UE
z The downlink outer loop power control is implemented inside the UE. Therefore, this
algorithm is specified by UE manufacturer.
z Generally, the UE L3 measures the received BLER and compares it with the BLERtar. If
the BLERmea is greater than the BLERtar, the L3 increases the SIRtar and send it to UE
L1; otherwise, the L3 decreases the SIRtar.
337
Summary
z In this course, we have discussed function, principle and

common parameters of the following power control
algorithm:
Open loop power control
Inner loop power control
Outer loop power control
338
Thank you
www.huawei.com
339
WCDMA Handover
Principle and
Relevant Parameters
www.huawei.com
66
Foreword
z Why mobile system need handover?
The mobility of UE
Load Balance
Any others ?
z Handover is a basic function of a cellular mobile network. The purpose of handover is

to ensure that a UE in CELL_DCH state is served continuously when it moves.
z HCS: hierarchical cell structure
67
z Handover types supported by UMTS
68
Objectives
Know the features of each handover
Know the algorithms of handover
Know the handover procedure
Know the parameters of handover
z Handover types supported by UMTS can be classified as:
Intra-frequency handover
Inter-frequency handover
Inter-RAT handover
69
The Basic Concepts of Handover
z Active Set z Maximum Ratio Combination
z Monitored Set z Selective Combination
z Detected Set z Soft Handover Gain
z Radio Link (RL) z P-CPICH
z Radio Link Set (RLS)
z Active set : Cells, which belong to the active set. User information is sent from all these cells.
In FDD, the cells in the active set are involved in soft handover. The UE shall only consider
active set cells included in the variable CELL_INFO_LIST for measurement; i.e. active set cells
not included in the CELL_INFO_LIST shall not be considered in any event evaluation and
measurement reporting.
z Monitored set :Cells, which are not included in the active set, but are included in the
CELL_INFO_LIST belong to the monitored set.
z Detected set : Cells detected by the UE, which are neither in the CELL_INFO_LIST nor in the
active set belong to the detected set. Reporting of measurements of the detected set is only
applicable to intra-frequency measurements made by UEs in CELL_DCH state.
z RL: Radio link between NodeB and UE.
z RLS: Radio link set. The RLs from same NodeB.
z Combination way: For soft handover, the uplink signals are combined in RNC. The RNC will
select one best signal to process. We call this selective combination. For softer handover, the
uplink signals are combined in the RAKE receiver of NodeB. It is maximum ratio combination.
z Soft handover gain: We have introduced in Coverage Planning.
z CPICH: Common Pilot Channel. UE measure the signal strength of CPICH for handover
decision.
70
Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover
2. Inter-Frequency Handover
3. Inter-RAT Handover
71
Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover Overview
2. Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure
3. Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover
72
Intra-Frequency Handover Overview
Characters of Intra-Frequency Handover:
z The carrier frequencies of the current cell and target cell are the same
Intra-frequency soft handover
Intra-frequency hard handover.
z Intra-frequency handover consists of two types,
Intra-frequency soft handover: more than one radio link are set up for the UE.
Intra-frequency hard handover: only one radio link is set up for the UE.
z Intra-frequency soft handover is more commonly used than intra-frequency hard

handover. Intra-frequency hard handover is used only in some special scenarios, for
example, when there is no Iur interface between two RNCs.
73
Comparison between soft handover and hard handover:
Item Soft Handover Hard Handover

The number of RLs in Several One
active set after handover
Interruption during No Yes

handover
The frequencies of cells Only happened Can be happened in Intra-

between Intra- frequency cells or Inter-frequency
frequency cells cells
z The maximum number of RL is 3. This value can be changed. But this function need
the UE to support. Normally, the active set supported by UE is fixed 3 and can not be
changed.
74
Intra-Frequency Soft Handover :
z Soft Handover
z Softer Handover
z Intra-Frequency soft handover is a function in which the UE is connected to several

cells at the same time. Addition or release of radio links are controlled by the ACTIVE
SET UPDATE procedure.
z During soft handover, a UE is in the overlapping cell coverage area of two sectors
belonging to different base stations. The communications between UE and base
station take place concurrently via two air interface channels from each base station
separately.
z During softer handover, a UE is in the overlapping cell coverage area of two adjacent
sectors of a base station. The communications between UE and base station take
place concurrently via two air interface channels, one for each sector separately.
75
Comparison between soft handover and softer handover :
Item Softer Handover Soft Handover

Scenario When the UE is in the overlapped When the UE is in the overlapped
coverage area of two neighboring coverage area of two neighboring
cells of a NodeB with combined RLs cells of different NodeBs
Uplink Using maximum-ratio combination Using selection combination

signal
Downlink Using maximum-ratio combination Using maximum-ratio combination

signal
Resource Occupying less Iub bandwidth Occupying more Iub bandwidth

use
During softer handover, the uplink signaling are combined in

NodeB by maximum ratio combination, but during soft
handover they are combined in RNC by selective
combination
Compare to later one, the maximum ratio combination can
get more gain. So the performance of maximum ratio
combination is better
Since softer handover is completed in NodeB, it do not
consume transport resource of Iub
76
Intra-Frequency Hard Handover :
z No Iur interface
z Iur interface is congested
z High-speed Best Effort (BE) service Handover
z Soft handover fails
z Intra-frequency hard handover refers to a handover where all the old radio links are
released before the new radio links are established. Compared with soft handover,
intra-frequency hard handover uses fewer resources.
z The scenarios of intra-frequency hard handover are as follows:
The UE needs to perform the intra-frequency handover between two

cells configured in different RNCs. No Iur interface is present between
RNCs.
The UE needs to perform the intra-frequency handover between two
cells configured in different RNCs. The Iur interface is congested
between RNCs.
There is a high-speed Best Effort (BE) service.
Compared with soft handover, intra-frequency hard handover is used to
save downlink bandwidth for a high-speed BE service.
The intra-frequency soft handover fails and intra-frequency hard
handover is allowed.
When intra-frequency soft handover fails because of a congestion problem of the
target cell, the RNC tries an intra-frequency hard handover with a lower service bit
rate.
The INTRA_FREQUENCY_HARD_HANDOVER_SWITCH parameter in the SET

CORRMALGOSWITCH command is used to determine whether to enable intra-
frequency hard handover. By default, this switch is ON.
77
Contents
78
Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure
The following figure shows handover
procedure
Measure the CPICH Ec/N0 of the serving cell and

its neighboring cells as well as the relative time
difference between the cells Measurement phase
Measurement Decision
No
Are handover criteria satisfied? Decision phase
Yes
Execution
Perform a handover and update relative parameters Execution phase
z Intra-frequency handover procedure is divided into three phases: handover

measurement, handover decision, and handover execution.
z After the UE transits to CELL_DCH state in connected mode during a call, the RNC
sends a measurement control message to instruct the UE to take measurements and
report the measurement event results.
z Upon receiving an event report from the UE, the RNC makes a handover decision
and performs the corresponding handover
79
Contents

1. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement
2. Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution
3. Neighboring Cell Combination Algorithm
80
Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement
MEASUREMENT CONTROL
UE UTRAN
MEASUREMENT CONTROL
z The measurement control message carries the following information:
z Event trigger threshold
z Hysteresis value
z Event trigger delay time
z Neighboring cell list
81
MEASUREMENT REPORT
UE UTRAN
MEASUREMENT REPORT
z The purpose of the measurement reporting procedure is to transfer

measurement results from the UE to UTRAN.
z Based on the algorithm in measurement control, the UE will measure the

signal strength or quality and check if it meet the requirement of all event. If it
meet the requirement of any event, UE will send the measurement report to
UTRAN to trigger the handover. The most important information in the
measurement are the PSC , the CPICH Ec/No of the target cell, and the
triggered event.
82
z L3 Filtering for Intra-Frequency Handover
z The value after L3 filtering procedure is calculated according to following formula:

Fn = (1 - α) x Fn-1 + α x Mn
z where
z Fn is the new measurement value obtained after L3 filtering.
z Fn-1 is the last measurement value obtained after L3 filtering.
z Mn is the latest measurement value obtained from the physical layer.
z α = 1/2(k/2) (k is set to Intra-freq meas L3 filter coeff)
z When α is set to 1, that is, k = 0, no L3 filtering is performed.
z A is measurement value at the physical layer
z B is the measurement value after layer 1 filtering at physical layer. The value goes from the
physical layer to high layer
z C is measurement after processing in the layer3 filter
z C’ is another measurement value
z D is measurement report information sent on the radio interface or Iub interface
83
Key parameters of Intra-frequency Measurement
z Intra-freq Measure Quantity

Parameter ID: IntraFreqMeasQuantity
The default value of this parameter is CPICH_Ec/No
z Intra-freq meas L3 filter coeff

Parameter ID: FilterCoef
The default value of this parameter is 3
The measurement quantity of intra-frequency handover can be Common Pilot

Channel (CPICH) Ec/No or CPICH Received Signal Code Power (RSCP). It can
be used in all the measurement events of intra-frequency handover
zIntra-freq Measure Quantity
Parameter ID: IntraFreqMeasQuantity
Value range: CPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP
Content: This parameter specifies the measurement quantity used in intra-
frequency measurement.
The default value of this parameter is CPICH_Ec/No
Set this parameter through SET INTRAFREQHO/ADD
CELLINTRAFREQHO/MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO .
Before judging a measurement event and sending the measurement report, the
UE performs L3 filtering for the measurement value.
zIntra-freq meas L3 filter coeff
Parameter ID: FilterCoef
Value range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19
Content: This parameter specifies the intra-frequency measurement L3 filter
coefficient. The greater this value is set, the greater the smoothing effect and
the higher the anti-fast fading capability are, but the lower the signal change
tracing capability is.
84
Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement Events
Event Description
1A The PCPICH quality or strength of the cells in the monitored set

enters the reporting range . This indicates that the cell is close to
the best cell . A relative high combined gain can be achieved when
the cell is added to the active set
1B The PCPICH quality or strength of the cells in the active set leaves
the reporting range. This indicates that a cell is much worse than
the quality of the best cell. The cell should not stay in the active set
1C A non-active PCPICH becomes better than an active PCPICH. This

indicates that the quality or strength of a cell is close to the best cell.
In addition ,the number of cells in the active set has reached the
maximum value. The cell replaces the worst cell in the active set ;
thus achieving a higher combined gain
1D Event of the change of the best cell
1J RAN10.0 provides the solution to the issue of how to add an

HSUPA cell in a DCH active set to an E-DCH active set. Event 1J
is added to the 3GPP protocol. This event is triggered when a non-
active E-DCH but active DCH primary CPICH becomes better than
an active E-DCH primary CPICH.
85
1A EVENT
z Event 1A is triggered on the basis of the following formula
⎛ NA ⎞
M New + CIONew ≥ W ⎜⎜ ∑ M i ⎟⎟ + (1 − W ) M Best − ( R1a − H1a / 2)
⎝ i =1 ⎠
MNew is the measurement value of the cell in the reporting range.
CIONew is equal to the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and
Neighboring cell oriented CIO, which is the offset between the cell in the
reporting range and the best cell in the active set.
W represents Weighted factor, used to weight the quality of the active set.
Mi is the measurement value of a cell in the active set.
NA is the number of cells not forbidden to affect the reporting range in the
active set.
MBest is the measurement value of the best cell in the active set.
R1a is the reporting range or the relative threshold of soft handover. The
threshold parameters of the CS non-VP service, VP service, and PS service
are as follows:
CS non VP service 1A event relative THD

VP service 1A event relative THD
PS service 1A event relative threshold

H1a represents 1A hysteresis, the hysteresis value of event 1A.
86
1A EVENT
A: signal curve of the best cell in the active set

B: signal curve of a cell in the monitoring set
C: Th1A curve
z If the signal quality of a cell that is not in the active set is higher than Th1A for a period of time
specified by 1A event trigger delay time (that is, Time to trigger in the figure), the UE reports
event 1A
87
Parameters of Intra-Frequency Handover
z CS non VP service 1A event relative THD

Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP
The default value of this parameter is 6 ( 3dB )
z VP service 1A event relative THD

Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP
z PS service 1A event relative threshold

Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1APS
z CS non VP service 1A event relative THD

Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP
Value range: 0~14.5; step: 0.5
Content: This parameter specifies the relative threshold of event 1A for the CS non-VP
service. The larger the parameter value is, the more easily event 1A is triggered..
The default value of this parameter is 6 (3dB)
Set this parameter through SET INTRAFREQHO/ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO/MOD
CELLINTRAFREQHO .
z VP service 1A event relative THD
Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP
Content: This parameter specifies the relative threshold of event 1A for the VP service.
The larger the parameter value is, the more easily event 1A is triggered..
CELLINTRAFREQHO .
z PS service 1A event relative THD
Content: This parameter specifies the PS service relative threshold of event 1A. The
smaller the parameter value is, the more easily event 1A is triggered.
CELLINTRAFREQHO .
88
z Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset

Parameter ID: CIO
The default value of this parameter is 0 (0dB )
z Neighboring cell oriented CIO

Parameter ID: CIOOffset

Parameter ID: CIO
Value range: -10 to +10
Content: This
parameter is used together with Neighboring cell
oriented CIO. The sum of the two parameter values is added to the
measurement quantity before the UE evaluates whether an event
occurred. In handover algorithms, this parameter is used for moving
the border of a cell.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP/MOD CELLSETUP
z Neighboring cell oriented CIO

Content: This
parameter is used together with Cell oriented Cell Individual
Offset. The sum of the two parameter values is added to the measurement
quantity before the UE evaluates whether an event has occurred. In handover
algorithms, this parameter is used for moving the border of 2 neighbors.
Set this parameter through ADD INTRAFREQNCELL/MOD INTRAFREQNCELL
89
z 1A hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1A
z 1A event trigger delay time

Parameter ID: TrigTime1A
The default value of this parameter is D320 ( 320ms )
z Weighted factor
Parameter ID: Weight
z 1A hysteresis
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event 1A. It is related to the
slow fading characteristic.

CELLINTRAFREQHO .
Value range: 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000
ms
Content: This parameter specifies the trigger delay time of event 1A. It is related to the
slow fading characteristic. The greater the parameter value, the smaller the probability of
misjudgment, but the slower the response of event reporting, triggered by measured signal
changes.
The recommended value of this parameter is D320 ( 320ms )

CELLINTRAFREQHO .
zWeighted factor
Parameter ID: Weight
Value range: 0~20,step:0.1

Content: This parameter is used to define the soft handover relative threshold based on
the measured value of each cell in the active set. The greater the parameter value, the
higher the soft handover relative threshold. When this value is set to 0, the soft handover
relative threshold is determined only by the best cell in the active set. .
The Default Value of this parameter is 0
CELLINTRAFREQHO . 90
1A Event Report Mode:
z Event Trigger Report

z Event to Periodical Report
The report mode of 1A is Event Trigger Report .

Generally the event 1A is reported only once. However, to avoid measurement report
loss, the event 1A reporting can be turned to periodical reporting.
91
z 1A event to periodical rpt period

Parameter ID: ReportIntervalfor1A
The default value of this parameter is D4000 (4000 ms )
z 1A event to periodical rpt number

Parameter ID: PeriodMRReportNumfor1A
The default value of this parameter is D16
z 1A event to periodical rpt period
Parameter ID: ReportIntervalfor1A
Value range: NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000,

D4000, D8000, D16000
Content: The reporting period for the event 1A. Generally the event 1A is
reported only once. However, to avoid measurement report loss, the event 1A
reporting can be turned to periodical reporting.
The default value of this parameter is D4000 (4000 ms)

z 1A event to periodical rpt number
Parameter ID: PeriodMRReportNumfor1A
Value range: D1, D2, D4, D8, D16, D32, D64, infinity
Content: The periodical reporting times for the event 1A. When the actual
times exceed this parameter, the periodical reporting comes to an end.
The recommended value of this parameter is D16

92
1B EVENT
z Event 1B is triggered on the basis of the following formula
⎛ NA ⎞
M Old + CIOOld ≤ W ⎜⎜ ∑ M i ⎟⎟ + (1 − W ) M Best − ( R1b + H1b / 2),
⎝ i =1 ⎠
MOld is the measurement value of the cell that becomes worse.
CIOOld is equal to the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and
Neighboring cell oriented CIO, which is the offset between the cell in the
reporting range and the best cell in the active set.
W represents Weighted factor, used to weight the quality of the active set.
Mi is the measurement value of the cell in the active set.
NA is the number of cells not forbidden to affect the reporting range in the
active set. MBest is the measurement value of the best cell in the active set.
R1b is the reporting range or the relative threshold of soft handover. The
threshold parameters of the CS non-VP service, VP service, and PS services
are as follows:
CS non VP service 1B event relative THD

VP service 1B event relative THD
PS service 1B event relative threshold

H1b represents 1B hysteresis, the hysteresis value of event 1B.
93
1B EVENT

B: signal curve of a cell in the monitoring set
C: Th1B curve
z If the signal quality of a cell in the active set is lower than Th1B curve for a period of
time specified by 1B event trigger delay time (Time to trigger in the figure), the UE
reports event 1B
94
z CS non VP service 1B event relative THD

Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP
z VP service 1B event relative THD

Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP
z PS service 1B event relative threshold

Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1BPS
z CS non VP service 1B event relative THD

Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP
Content: This parameter specifies the relative threshold of event 1B for the CS non-
VP service. The smaller the parameter value is, the more easily event 1B is triggered .
CELLINTRAFREQHO .
z VP service 1B event relative THD

Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP
Content: This parameter specifies the relative threshold of event 1A for the VP
service. The smaller the parameter value is, the more easily event 1B is triggered .
CELLINTRAFREQHO .
z PS service 1A event relative THD

Content: This parameter specifies the PS service relative threshold of event 1A. The
smaller the parameter value is, the more easily event 1B is triggered .
CELLINTRAFREQHO .
95
z 1B hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1B
z 1B event trigger delay time

Parameter ID: TrigTime1B
z 1B hysteresis
Content: This
parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event 1B. It is related
to the slow fading characteristic.


Parameter ID: TrigTime1B
Value range: 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560,
5000 ms
Content: This
parameter specifies the trigger delay time of event 1B. It is
related to the slow fading characteristic. The greater the parameter value, the
smaller the probability of misjudgment, but the slower the response of event
reporting, triggered by measured signal changes.
Set this parameter through SET

INTRAFREQHO/ADD
96
1C EVENT
z Event 1C is triggered on the basis of the following formula
M New + CIONew ≥ M InAS + CIOInAS + H1c / 2,
MNew is the measurement value of the cell in the reporting range.
CIONew is the cell individual offset value of the cell in the reporting range. It is
equal to the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and Neighboring
cell oriented CIO, which is the offset between the cell in the reporting range
and the best cell in the active set.
MInAS is the measurement value of the worst cell in the active set.
CIOInAS is the cell individual offset value of the worst cell in the active set. It is
equal to the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and Neighboring
cell oriented CIO.
H1c represents 1C hysteresis, the hysteresis value of event 1C.
97
1C EVENT

B: signal curve of a cell in the active set
C: signal curve of the worst cell in the active set
D: signal curve of a cell in the monitoring set
E: Th1C curve
z If the signal quality of a cell not in the active set is higher than Th1C for a period of time
specified by 1C event trigger delay time (Time to trigger in the figure), the UE
reports event 1C
98
z 1C hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1C
z 1C event trigger delay time

Parameter ID: TrigTime1C
z1C hysteresis
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event
1C. It is related to the slow fading characteristic.

z1C event trigger delay time

Value range: 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320,
640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ms

Content: This parameter specifies the trigger delay time of
event 1C. It is related to the slow fading characteristic. The

greater the parameter value, the smaller the probability of
misjudgment, but the slower the response of event reporting,
triggered by measured signal changes.
99
1C Event Report Mode:
z Event Trigger Report

z Event to Periodical Report
The report mode of 1C is Event Trigger Report .

Generally the event 1C is reported only once. However, to avoid measurement report
loss, the event 1C reporting can be turned to periodical reporting.
100
z 1C event to periodical rpt period

Parameter ID: ReportIntervalfor1C
z 1C event to periodical rpt number

Parameter ID: PeriodMRReportNumfor1C
z 1C event to periodical rpt period
Parameter ID: ReportIntervalfor1C
Value range: NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000,

D4000, D8000, D16000
Content: The reporting period for the event 1C. Generally the event 1C is
reported only once. However, to avoid measurement report loss, the event 1C
reporting can be turned to periodical reporting.

z 1C event to periodical rpt number
Parameter ID: PeriodMRReportNumfor1C
Value range: D1, D2, D4, D8, D16, D32, D64, infinity
Content: The periodical reporting times for the event 1C. When the actual
times exceed this parameter, the periodical reporting comes to an end.
The recommended value of this parameter is D16

101
1D EVENT
z Event 1D is triggered on the basis of the following formula
M Notbest ≥ 10 M Best + H1d / 2,
MNotBest is the measurement value of a cell that is not in the list of the
best cells.
MBest is the measurement value of the best cell in the active set.
H1d represents 1D hysteresis, the hysteresis value of event 1D.
102
1D Event

B: signal curve of a cell in the active set or monitoring set
C: Th1D curve
z If the signal quality of a cell not in the active set is higher than Th1D for a
period of time specified by 1D event trigger delay time (Time to trigger in the
figure), the UE reports event 1D
103
z 1D hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1D
z 1D event trigger delay time

Parameter ID: TrigTime1D
z1D hysteresis
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event
1D. It is related to the slow fading characteristic.

z1D event trigger delay time

Parameter ID: TrigTime1D
Value range: 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320,
640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ms

Content: This parameter specifies the trigger delay time of
event 1D. It is related to the slow fading characteristic. The

greater the parameter value, the smaller the probability of
misjudgment, but the slower the response of event reporting,
triggered by measured signal changes.
104
1J EVENT
z Event 1J is triggered on the basis of the following formula
M New + CIONew ≥ M InAS + CIOInAS + H1J / 2,
z Reporting event 1J: A non-active E-DCH but active DCH primary CPICH becomes better than
an active E-DCH primary CPICH
z MNew is the measurement result of the cell not included in the E-DCH active set but included in
DCH active set.
z CIONew is the individual cell offset for the cell not included in the E-DCH active set but included
in DCH active set becoming better than the cell in the E-DCH active set if an individual cell
offset is stored for that cell. Otherwise, it equals 0.
z MInAS is the measurement result of the cell in the E-DCH active set with the lowest
measurement result.
z CIOInAS is the individual cell offset for the cell in the E-DCH active set that is becoming worse
than the new cell.
z H1J is the hysteresis parameter for event 1J.
105
1J Event
A: signal quality curve of a cell in the E-DCH active set

B: signal quality curve of the worst cell in the E-DCH active set
C: signal quality curve of a cell not in the E-DCH active set but included in DCH active set
D: signal quality curve of a cell not in the E-DCH active set but included in DCH active set
In the figure, the hysteresis and the cell individual offsets for all cells equal 0
z The first measurement report is sent when primary CPICH D becomes better than primary
CPICH B. The "cell measurement event result" of the measurement report contains the
information of primary CPICH D and CPICH B.
z On the assumption that the E-DCH active set has been updated after the first measurement
report (E-DCH active set is now primary CPICH A and primary CPICH D), the second report is
sent when primary CPICH C becomes better than primary CPICH A. The "cell measurement
event result" of the second measurement report contains the information of primary CPICH C
and primary CPICH A.
z The parameters described in the following need to be set on the RNC LMT:
1J hysteresis
1J event trigger delay time
1J event to periodical rpt number
1J event to periodical rpt period
106
z 1J Event function
3GPP define the maximum DCH active set size is 6 and the maximum
E-DCH active set size is 4
The DCH active set covers the E-DCH active set or they are the same
The best cell in E-DCH active set should be the same as that in DCH
active set
Uplink channel type of UE is decided by the best cell in DCH active
set
Uplink channel is E-DCH if the best cell in DCH active set supports HSUPA
Uplink channel is DCH if the best cell in DCH active set can NOT support
HSUPA
107
z Processing procedure for 1J Event
The UE reports 1J Event if it find a non-active E-DCH but active DCH
cell PCICH becomes better than an active E-DCH PCIPCH
RNC will add the target cell into E-DCH active set if the E-DCH active set is
NOT full
RNC will perform replace procedure if the E-DCH active set is full
108
z 1J hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1J
z 1J event trigger delay time
Parameter ID: TrigTime1J
z Max number of cell in edch active cell
Parameter ID: MAXEDCHCELLINACTIVESET
z1J hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1J
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event 1J. It
is related to the slow fading characteristic.

z1J event trigger delay time

Parameter ID: TrigTime1J
Value range: 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640,
1280, 2560, 5000 ms

Content: This parameter specifies the trigger delay time of event 1D.
It is related to the slow fading characteristic.

zMax number of cell in edch active cell

Parameter ID: MAXEDCHCELLINACTIVESET
Value range: 1 to 4
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of cells in
the E-DCH active set.

The recommended value of this parameter is 3
Set this parameter through SET HOCOMM .
109
z 1A Event Report Mode:

Event Trigger Report
Event to Periodical Report
z Parameters
1J event to periodical rpt period
Parameter ID: ReportIntervalfor1J
1J event to periodical rpt number
Parameter ID: PeriodMRReportNumfor1J
The report mode of 1J is Event Trigger Report .

Generally the event 1J is reported only once. However, to avoid measurement
report loss, the event 1J reporting can be turned to periodical reporting.
z 1J event to periodical rpt period

CELLINTRAFREQHO/MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO
z 1J event to periodical rpt number
110
Contents

111
Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution
RNC will make decision and execute handover depends on the
Events the RNC receives.
z 1A Event
z 1B Event
z 1C Event
z 1D Event
z 1J Event
Event Decision and Execution
When receiving an event 1A report, the RNC decides whether to add a

cell.
For event 1A, the UE can report more than one cell in the event list in
one measurement report. These cells are in the list of the Measurement
1A
Control message, and they are sequenced in descending order by
measurement quantity.
For the cells in the list, the RNC adds the radio link to the active set only
if the number of cells in the active set does not reach the maximum value.
When receiving an event 1B report, the RNC determines whether to
1B
delete a cell.
When receiving an event 1C report, the RNC decides whether to change
the worst cell.
For event 1C, the UE reports a list that contains good cells and the cells
1C to be replaced, and sequences the cells in descending order by
measurement quantity.
After receiving the list from the UE, the RNC replaces the bad cells in the
active set with the good cells in the list.
112
When receiving an event 1D report, which includes information about only
one cell, the RNC learns that the quality of this cell is better than that of the
serving cell and takes one of the following actions:
If the reported cell is in the active set, the RNC decides whether to change
•
the best cell or reconfigure measurement control.

If the reported cell is in the monitored set,
•
•If the number of cells in the active set has not reached the
maximum value, the RNC decides a soft handover and adds the
1D
cell to the active set.
•If the number of cells in the active set has reached the maximum
value, the RNC decides a soft handover and replaces the worst cell
in the active set with the reported cell.
The RNC determines whether the intra-frequency hard handover scenarios
•
are applicable. For detailed information, see 3.1 Intra-Frequency Handover

Types. If any scenario is applicable, the RNC performs an intra-frequency
hard handover.
When receiving an event 1J report with information about the good cells
and the cells to be replaced, the RNC proceeds as follows:
If the current number of cells in the E-DCH active set is less than the value
•
of Max number of cell in edch active set, the uplink of the cell where
event 1J is triggered is reconfigured to E-DCH.
1J If the current number of cells in the E-DCH active set is equal to the value
•
of Max number of cell in edch active set, the RNC searches the
measurement report for the non-serving Cell_EDCH with the lowest
measured quality in the E-DCH active set. Then, the uplink of the cell
where event 1J is triggered is reconfigured from DCH to E-DCH, and
the uplink of CELL-EDCH is reconfigured from E-DCH to DCH.
113
When make decision, RNC must follow these restrictions
z Max number of cell in active set

Parameter ID: MaxCellInActiveSet
z Minimum Quality Threshold for SHO

Parameter ID: SHOQualmin
The default value of this parameter is -24 ( -24dB)
zMax number of cell in active set

Parameter ID: MaxCellInActiveSet
Value range: 1~6;

Content: This parameter specifies the Max number of cell in
active set.
zMinimum Quality Threshold for SHO

Parameter ID: SHOQualmin
Value range: -24~0,step:1dB
Content: This parameter specifies the minimum quality

threshold for soft handover..
The recommended value of this parameter is -24 (-24dB)

114
Rate Reduction After an SHO Failure
z For R99 NRT services to increase the probability of a successful soft

handover, the rate reduction is triggered after a admission failure
1A,1C,1D is received by RNC
Execute admission control in target cell
Admission succeed?
Rate Reduction
Execute Handover
If the RNC receives a 1A, 1C, or 1D measurement report, the

corresponding cell tries to admit the UE. If the cell fails to admit
the UE, the RNC performs the estimation procedure for rate
reduction.
115
Rate Reduction After an SHO Failure
z procedure for rate reduction

Estimation
Execution
116
z Estimation Procedure for Rate Reduction
117
The estimation procedure after the cell fails to admit the UE is described as follows:
z Step 1 : The RNC evaluates whether the measurement quantity of the cell failing
to be admitted meets the condition of rate reduction.
If the condition is met, the RNC performs a rate reduction process for the
handover service immediately.
If the condition is not met, the RNC performs Step2.
z The condition of rate reduction is as follows:
z Mnew > Mbest_cell - RelThdForDwnGrd
z where
Mnew is the CPICH Ec/No measurement value of the cell failing to be admitted.
Mbest_cell is the CPICH Ec/No measurement value of the best cell in the active
set.
RelThdForDwnGrd is configured through the parameter Relative threshold of
SHO failure.
z Step 2 :The RNC evaluates whether the number of SHO failures in the cell
exceeds the Threshold number of SHO failure.
If the number of SHO failures in the cell is smaller than the Threshold number
of SHO failure, the RNC determines whether the SHO failure evaluation timer
has been started:
If the timer has not been started, the RNC starts it.
If the timer has been started, the RNC increments the SHO failure
counter by one.
Before the SHO failure evaluation timer expires, no action is taken
and the RNC waits for the next measurement report period.
z When the SHO failure evaluation timer expires, the RNC sets the SHO failure
counter of the corresponding cell to 0 and ends the evaluation.
If the number of SHO failures in the cell is larger than or equal to the
Threshold number of SHO failure, the RNC performs a rate reduction
process for the access service and sets the SHO failure counter of the
corresponding cell to 0.
118
z Relative threshold of SHO failure

Parameter ID: RelThdForDwnGrd
z Max evaluation period of SHO failure

Parameter ID: ShoFailPeriod
The default value of this parameter is 60 ( 60s )
z Threshold number of SHO failure

Parameter ID: ShoFailNumForDwnGrd
zRelative threshold of SHO failure

Parameter ID: RelThdForDwnGrd
Value range: -29 to +29 ; step: 0.5 dB
Content: This parameter specifies the relative threshold for direct rate reduction after an SHO
failure. If the difference between the signal quality of the target cell to which an SHO fails and that
of the best cell is lower than this relative threshold, the RNC directly initiates a rate reduction
process in the active set, regardless of the limitation on the number of SHO failures.
Set this parameter through SET INTRAFREQHO.
Max evaluation period of SHO failure

Parameter ID: ShoFailPeriod
Value range: 0~120s
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum evaluation period of SHO failures for rate
reduction. During the evaluation period, the RNC records the number of SHO failures in at most
three cells for each UE. After the evaluation period, the RNC clears this record.
The recommended value of this parameter is 60 ( 60s )
Set this parameter through SET INTRAFREQHO
zThreshold number of SHO failure
Parameter ID: ShoFailNumForDwnGrd
Value range: 0~63
Content: This parameter specifies the threshold number of SHO failures for rate reduction. If the
number of SHO failures in a cell reaches or exceeds this threshold during the period specified by
Max evaluation period of SHO failure, the RNC performs a rate reduction process in the active
set. After the rate reduction succeeds, the RNC initiates an SHO in the cell.
The recommended value of this parameter is 3
119
z Execution Procedure of Rate Reduction
The rate reduction execution procedure is :
z Step1：The RNC performs a rate reduction process for the

access service.
z Step2：After the rate reduction succeeds, the RNC immediately

attempts to add this cell to the active set without measurement:
If the cell succeeds in admitting the UE, the

RNC adds the radio link and sets the SHO
failure counter of the cell to 0 and ends the
execution.
If the cell fails to admit the UE, the RNC starts
the Period of penalty timer for SHO failure
after down rate to avoid an increase in the rate
triggered by DCCC within the period. Also in this
period, the RNC sets the SHO failure counter of
the cell to 0 and ends the execution.
If fails to perform a soft handover again, RNC performs the
estimation procedure and the execution procedure, as
previously described.
120
Parameters of Rate Reduction Execution
z Period of penalty timer for SHO failure after down rate

Parameter ID: DcccShoPenaltyTime
The default value of this parameter is 30 ( 30s )
z Period of penalty timer for SHO failure after down rate

Parameter ID: DcccShoPenaltyTime
Value range: 0 to 255 ; step: 1 s
Content: If an SHO fails again after the rate reduction, the RNC is forbidden to increase the rate
during the period specified by this parameter.

The default value of this parameter is 30 ( 30s)
Set this parameter through SET INTRAFREQHO.
121
Contents
1. Intra-Frequency handover Overview

122
Neighboring Cell Combination Algorithm
z When the UE is in soft handover state z The combined neighboring cell list is affect by :
Intra-frequency neighboring cells Repeat times
Inter-frequency neighboring cells Serving cell signal quality (Ec/No) order
Inter-RAT neighboring cells Neighboring cell priority
z After obtaining the intra-frequency neighboring cells of each cell in the active set, the RNC calculates
the union neighboring cell set of the intra-frequency cells, which is also referred as Sall, by using the
following method. This method can also be used to generate the Sall of inter-frequency or inter-RAT
cells.
1,The intra-frequency, inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells of each cell in the current
active set are obtained.
2,The RNC sequences the cells in the active set in descending order of CPICH Ec/No according to
the latest measurement report (event 1A, 1B, 1C, or 1D) from the UE. The best cell is based on
event 1D, whereas other cells are based on the latest measurement report.
3,The cells in the active set are added to Sall.
4,The neighboring cells of the best cell in the active set are added to Sall. The priority of neighbor
cell, which are set for each neighboring cell, are used to change the order of adding the
neighboring cells to Sall.
5,The neighboring cells of other cells in the active set are added to Sall in descending order by
CPICH Ec/No values of these cells in the active set. The neighboring cells of the same cell in
the active set are added according to The priority of neighbor cell and repeated number of
repeated neighboring cell is recorded.
6,If there are more than 32 neighboring cells in Sall, delete the neighboring cells whose repeat
number in Sall is less. The top 32 neighboring cells are grouped into the final Sall.
If The flag of the priority is switched to FALSE, The priority of neighbor cell is cleared.
If The flag of the priority is switched to TRUE, The priority of neighbor cell is set
simultaneously.
123
Parameters of Neighboring Cell Combination Algorithm
z Neighboring Cell Combination Switch

Parameter ID: NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH
The default value of this parameter is OFF
z The flag of the priority
Parameter ID: NPrioFlag
The default value of this parameter is FALSE
z The priority of neighbor cell
Parameter ID: NPrio
The default value of this parameter is None
The NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH of Handover Algorithm Switch parameter

decides the measurement range of neighboring cells
If the switch is set to ON, measurement objects are chosen from the
neighboring cells of all the cells in the active set.
If the switch is set to OFF, measurement objects are chosen from the
neighboring cells of the best cell.
But, limited by the 3GPP, the maximum number of neighboring cells is 32. So if
the NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH is ON, it very possible that the neighboring
cell of all the cells in the active set may exceed 32.
By the Neighboring Cell Combination Algorithm , RNC will choose 32 neighboring
cell for measurement.
z Neighboring Cell Combination Switch
Parameter ID: NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH
Value range: OFF, ON
Content: If the switch is set to ON, measurement objects are chosen from the
neighboring cells of all the cells in the active set.If the switch is set to OFF,
measurement objects are chosen from the neighboring cells of the best cell.
Set this parameter through SET CORRMALGOSWITCH
124
z The flag of the priority
Parameter ID: NPrioFlag
Value range: FALSE, TRUE
Content:
FALSE: The priority of the neighboring cell is invalid. The neighboring
cells whose priority flag is FALSE are the last ones to be considered
as the measurement objects in the neighboring cell combination
algorithm.
TRUE: The priority of the neighboring cell is valid in the neighboring
cell combination algorithm. .
Set this parameter through ADD INTRAFREQNCELL/MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL / ADD INTERFREQNCELL/MOD INTERFREQNCELL /
ADD GSMNCELL/MOD GSMNCELL
z The priority of neighbor cell

Parameter ID: NPrio
The default value of this parameter is None
Content:
When The flag of the priority is TRUE, The priority of neighbor cell specifies
the priority of neighboring cells. The smaller the parameter value is, the higher
the priority is and the more easily the neighboring cell is chosen as a
measurement object in the neighboring cell combination algorithm. For
example, the neighboring cells with priority 1 are more easily chosen as the
measurement objects than the cells with priority 2 in the neighboring cell
combination algorithm.
z Set this parameter through
ADD INTRAFREQNCELL/MOD INTRAFREQNCELL / ADD
INTERFREQNCELL/MOD INTERFREQNCELL / ADD GSMNCELL/MOD
GSMNCELL
125
Contents
126
Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover
There are five types of signaling procedures for intra-

frequency handover:
• Intra-NodeB Intra-Frequency Soft Handover

• Intra-RNC Inter-NodeB Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
• Inter-RNC Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
• Intra-RNC Inter-NodeB Intra-Frequency Hard Handover
• Inter-RNC Intra-Frequency Hard Handover
127
Intra-NodeB Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
128
Intra-RNC Inter-NodeB Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
129
Inter-RNC Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
130
Intra-RNC Inter-NodeB Intra-Frequency Hard Handover
131
Contents
132
Contents
z Inter-Frequency Handover Overview
z Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure
z Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover
133
Inter-Frequency Overview
Characters of Inter-Frequency Handover:
z The carrier frequency of the current cell and target cell are different
z Based on the triggering causes of handover, inter-frequency handover

can be categorized into four types .
Coverage-based
QoS-based
Load-based
Speed-based
z Coverage-based inter-frequency handover

If a moving UE leaves the coverage of the current frequency, the RNC needs
to trigger the coverage-based inter-frequency handover to avoid call drops
z QoS-based inter-frequency handover
According to the Link Stability Control Algorithm, the RNC needs to trigger the
QoS-based inter-frequency handover to avoid call drops.
z Load-based inter-frequency blind handover
To balance the load between inter-frequency con-coverage cells, the RNC
chooses some UEs and performs the inter-frequency blind handover
according to user priorities and service priorities.
z Speed-based inter-frequency handover
When the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) applies, the cells are divided into
different layers according to coverage. The macro cell has a larger coverage
and a lower priority, whereas the micro cell has a smaller coverage and a
higher priority. Inter-frequency handover can be triggered by the UE speed
estimation algorithm of the HCS. To reduce the frequencies of handover, the
UE at a higher speed is handed over to a cell under a larger coverage,
whereas the UE at a lower speed is handed over to a cell under a smaller
coverage.
134
Contents
1. Inter-Frequency Handover Overview
2. Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure
1. Coverage-based inter-frequency handover
2. QoS-based inter-frequency handover
3. Load-based inter-frequency handover
4. Speed-based inter-frequency handover
5. Blind handover Based on Event 1F
6. Inter-frequency anti-PingPong
7. Inter-frequency handover retry
3. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover
135
Procedure of Coverage-based inter-frequency handover
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover
z In the triggering phase
The RNC notifies the UE to measure through an inter-frequency measurement control
message. If the quality of the pilot signal in the current cell deteriorates, the CPICH Ec/No or
CPICH RSCP of the UMTS cell that the UE accesses is lower than the corresponding
threshold, and the UE reports event 2D.
z In the measurement phase
If the RNC receives a report of event 2D, the RNC requests the NodeB and UE to start the
compressed mode to measure the qualities of inter-frequency neighboring cells, and the RNC
sends an inter-frequency measurement control message.
In the measurement phase, the method of either periodical measurement report or event-
triggered measurement report can be used.
z In the decision phase
After the UE reports event 2B, the RNC performs the handover. Otherwise, the UE periodically
generates measurement reports, and the RNC makes a decision after evaluation.
z In the execution phase
The RNC executes the handover procedure.
136
Coverage-based inter-frequency handover
MEASUREMENT EVENTS
Event Description
2D The estimated quality or strength of the currently used frequency is below a

certain threshold.
2F The estimated quality or strength of the currently used frequency is above a

certain threshold.
When the estimated quality or strength of the currently used frequency is below a certain threshold,2D
Event will be triggered, Then RNC will initiate the compress Mode to start inter-
frequency or inter-RAT handover measurement.
During compress mode, if the the estimated quality of the currently used frequency is above a certain
threshold, 2F Event will be triggered, Then RNC will stop the compress Mode.
137
Compressed Mode
z Purpose
Measure the inter-frequency cell or Inter-RAT cell under FDD mode
z Categories
Downlink compressed mode
Uplink compressed mode
z Realization Methods
SF/2
Higher layer scheduling
z Compressed Mode control is a mechanism whereby certain idle periods are created
in radio frames during which the UE can perform measurements on other frequencies.
The UE can carry out measurements in the neighbouring cell, such as GSM cell and
FDD cell on other frequency. If the UE needs to measure the pilot signal strength of
an inter-frequency WCDMA or GSM cell and has one frequency receiver only, the UE
must use the compressed mode.
z Each physical frame can provide 3 to 7 timeslots for the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
cell measurement, which enhances the transmit capability of physical channels but
reduces the volume of data traffic.
z In DL, during compressed mode ,UE receiver can test signal from other frequency. In
order to avoid the effect cause by UE transmitter, compress mode is also used in UL.
z The compressed mode includes two types, spreading factor reduction (SF/2) and high
layer approaches. The usage of type of compressed mode is decided by the RNC,
according to spreading factor used in uplink or downlink.
138
2D EVENT
QUsed <= TUsed2d - H2d/2
QUsed is the measured quality of the used frequency.

TUsed2d is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current
frequency. Based on the service type (CS , PS domain R99 service, or PS
domain HSPA service) and measurement quantity (CPICH Ec/No or RSCP),
this threshold can be configured through one of the following parameters:
Inter-freq CS measure start Ec/No THD

Inter-freq R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD
Inter-freq H measure start Ec/No THD
Inter-freq CS measure start RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS measure start RSCP THD
Inter-freq H measure start RSCP THD
H2d is the event 2D hysteresis value 2D hysteresis.

After the conditions of event 2D are fulfilled and maintained until the parameter 2D
event trigger delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 2D measurement
report message.
Note:
Any of the Ec/No and RSCP measurement result can trigger the 2D event.
139
Parameters of inter-frequency handover
z Inter-freq CS measure start Ec/No THD

Parameter ID: InterFreqCSThd2DEcNo
The default value of this parameter is -14dB
z Inter-freq R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD

Parameter ID : InterFreqR99PsThd2DEcNo
z Inter-freq H measure start Ec/No THD

Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2DEcN0
z Inter-freq CS measure start Ec/No THD

Value range: –24 to 0 ,step :1dB.
Content: If the CS service uses Ec/No as a measurement quantity, the UE reports event 2D when the
measurement value is lower than the threshold. The RNC sends a message to enable the compressed
mode and to start the inter-frequency measurement.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET
INTERFREQHOCOV .
z Inter-freq R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD



Content: If the PS domain R99 service uses Ec/No as a measurement quantity, the UE reports event 2D
when the measurement value is lower than the threshold. The RNC sends a message to enable the
compressed mode and to start the inter-frequency measurement.

INTERFREQHOCOV
z Inter-freq H measure start Ec/No THD

Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2DEcN0



Content: For PS domain HSPA services, when Ec/No is used as the measurement quantity for inter-
frequency measurement, the RNC sends the signaling to activate compressed mode and start inter-
frequency measurement, if the UE reports the event 2D when the measured value is smaller than the
value of this parameter.

INTERFREQHOCOV
140
z Inter-freq CS measure start RSCP THD

The default value of this parameter is -95dBm
z Inter-freq R99 PS measure start RSCP THD

Parameter ID : InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP
z Inter-freq H measure start RSCP THD

Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2DRSCP
z Inter-freq CS measure start RSCP THD

Value range: –115 to -25 dBm ,step :1dB.
Content: If the CS service uses RSCP as a measurement quantity, the UE reports event 2D
when the measurement value is lower than the threshold. The RNC sends a message to
enable the compressed mode and to start the inter-frequency measurement..
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/MOD
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET INTERFREQHOCOV .
z Inter-freq R99 PS measure start RSCP THD

Content: If the PS domain R99 service uses RSCP as a measurement quantity, the UE
reports event 2D when the measurement value is lower than the threshold. The RNC sends a
message to enable the compressed mode and to start the inter-frequency measurement.

CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET INTERFREQHOCOV
z Inter-freq H measure start RSCP THD
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2DRSCP

Content: For PS domain HSPA services, when RSCP is used as the measurement quantity
for inter-frequency measurement, the RNC sends the signaling to activate compressed mode
and start inter-frequency measurement, if the UE reports the event 2D when the measured
value is smaller than the value of this parameter .

141
z 2D hysteresis

Parameter ID : TimeToTrig2D
z 2D hysteresis

Value range: 0 to 29 step :0.5dB.

Content: This parameter specifies the event 2D trigger hysteresis, which is related
to slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of
ping-pong effect and misjudgment. In this case, however, the event cannot be
triggered in time.


Value range: D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320,
D640, D1280, D2560, D5000

Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 2D trigger delay, which is
related to slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the
probability of misjudgment. In this case, however, the event responds to the changes
of measured signals at a lower speed.

142
Coverage-based inter-frequency
handover
z 2F EVENT
Event 2F is triggered on the basis of the following formula
QUsed >= TUsed2d - H2d/2
TUsed2f is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current frequency.
Based on the service type (CS , PS domain R99 service or PS domain HSPA
service) and measurement quantity (CPICH Ec/No or RSCP), this threshold can be
configured through the following parameters:
Inter-freq CS measure stop Ec/No THD

Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop Ec/No THD
Inter-freq H measure stop Ec/No THD
Inter-freq CS measure stop RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop RSCP THD
Inter-freq H measure stop RSCP THD
H2f is the event 2F hysteresis value 2F hysteresis.
After the conditions of event 2F are fulfilled and maintained until the parameter 2F
event trigger delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 2F measurement
report message.
Note:
Any of Ec/No and RSCP measurement result can trigger the 2F event.
143
z Inter-freq CS measure stop Ec/No THD

Parameter ID: InterFreqCSThd2FEcNo
z Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop Ec/No THD

Parameter ID : InterFreqR99PsThd2FEcNo
z Inter-freq H measure stop Ec/No THD

Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2FEcN0

Parameter ID: InterFreqCSThd2FEcNo
Content: If the CS service uses Ec/No as a measurement quantity, the UE reports event 2F
when the measurement value is higher than the threshold. The RNC sends a message to
disable the compressed mode and to stop the inter-frequency measurement.
Parameter ID : InterFreqR99PsThd2FEcNo


Content: If the PS domain R99 service uses Ec/No as a measurement quantity, the UE
reports event 2F when the measurement value is higher than the threshold. The RNC sends a
message to disable the compressed mode and to stop the inter-frequency measurement.

z Inter-freq H measure stop Ec/No THD
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2FEcN0


Content: For PS domain HSPA services, when Ec/No is used as the measurement quantity
for inter-frequency measurement, the RNC sends the signaling to deactivate compressed
mode and stop inter-frequency measurement, if the UE reports the event 2F when the
measured value is larger than the value of this parameter .

144
z Inter-freq CS measure stop RSCP THD

Parameter ID: InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP
The default value of this parameter is -92 dBm
z Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop RSCP THD

Parameter ID : InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSCP
z Inter-freq H measure stop RSCP THD

Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2FRSCP

Parameter ID: InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP
Content: If the CS service uses RSCP as a measurement quantity, the UE reports event 2F
when the measurement value is higher than the threshold. The RNC sends a message to
disable the compressed mode and to stop the inter-frequency measurement.
Parameter ID : InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSCP


Content: If the PS domain R99 service uses RSCP as a measurement quantity, the UE
reports event 2F when the measurement value is higher than the threshold. The RNC sends a
message to disable the compressed mode and to stop the inter-frequency measurement.

z Inter-freq H measure stop RSCP THD
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2FRSCP


Content: For PS domain HSPA services, when RSCP is used as the measurement quantity
for inter-frequency measurement, the RNC sends the signaling to deactivate compressed
mode and stop inter-frequency measurement, if the UE reports the event 2F when the
measured value is larger than the value of this parameter .

145
z 2F hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor2F
z 2F event trigger delay time

z2F hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor2F
Value range: 0 to 29 step :0.5dB.
Content: This parameter specifies the event 2F trigger hysteresis, which is
related to slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller
the probability of ping-pong effect and misjudgment. In this case, however,
the event cannot be triggered in time.
z2F event trigger delay time

Value range: D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200,
D240, D320, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000

Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 2F trigger delay, which
is related to slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller
the probability of misjudgment. In this case, however, the event responds to
the changes of measured signals at a lower speed.

146
Handover Measurement
UE RNC
Measurement report 2D
Physical Channel Recfg (CM)
Physical Channel Recfg Complet(CM)
Measurement control (RSCP)
Measurement control (Ec/No)
When the UE enters the compress mode, RNC will trigger the inter-frequency handover
measurement by two additional measurement control signaling , so as to request UE
test inter-frequency neighbor cell.
In this Measurement control message, RNC should inform the UE inter-frequency

measurement parameter (Neighbor list, reporting mode…)
147
z Handover Measurement
Report Mode
RNC UE RNC
UE
Measurement control (Periodical, RSCP&Ec/No) Measurement control (Event triggering, RSCP)
Measurement control (Event triggering ,Ec/No)

Measurement report
Measurement report (2B RSCP or Ec/No)
Measurement report
Measurement report Handover
Handover
Periodical_reporting Event_trigger
The measurement report mode of inter-frequency handover is configured through the

parameter Inter-frequency measure report mode. By default ,periodically reporting
is recommended.
The advantage of periodical measurement report is that if the handover fails, the RNC
reattempts the handover to the same cell after receiving the periodical measurement
report from the UE. This increases the probability of the success of inter-frequency
handover.
Based on the measurement control message received from the RNC, the UE periodically
reports the measurement quality of the target cell. Then, based on the measurement
report, the RNC makes the handover decision and performs handover.
148
Parameters of inter-frequency
handover
z Inter-frequency measure report mode
Parameter ID: InterFreqReportMode
The default value of this parameter is Periodical reporting
z Inter-frequency measure periodical rpt period

Parameter ID: PeriodReportInterval
z Inter-freq measure timer length

Parameter ID: InterFreqMeasTime
The default value of this parameter is 60 (60 s)
zInter-frequency measure report mode

Parameter ID: InterFreqReportMode
Value range :Periodical reporting, Event trigger
Content: This parameter specifies the inter-frequency measurement report mode.
zInter-frequency measure periodical rpt period
Value range : NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000, 8000,
12000, 16000, 20000, 24000, 28000, 32000, 64000

The default value of this parameter is D500 (500ms)
Content: This parameter specifies the interval of the inter-frequency measurement report.
zInter-freq measure timer length
Value range : 0 to 512 ,step 1s
Content: This parameter specifies the inter-frequency measurement timer length of the inter-
frequency handover based on coverage or speed. This parameter has no effect on the inter-
frequency measurement based on QoS.
If no such type of inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiry of the inter-
frequency measurement timer, the system stops the inter-frequency

measurement and disables the compressed mode.
If this parameter is set to 0, the RNC does not start the inter-frequency
measurement timer. .
Set this parameter for handover based on coverage through ADD
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET INTERFREQHOCOV
149
Coverage-based inter-frequency
handover
z Handover Measurement
Event 2B is triggered on the basis of the following formula
QNoused >= TNoused2b + H2b/2
QUsed <= TUsed2b - H2b/2
QNoused is the measured quality of the cell that uses the other frequencies.
TNoused2b is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the other frequencies. Based
on the service type (CS , PS domain) and measurement quantity (CPICH Ec/No or RSCP),
this threshold can be configured through the following parameters:
Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD

Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger RSCP THD

Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger RSCP THD
150
QUsed is the measured quality of the cell that uses the current frequency.
TUsed2b is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current frequency.
Based on the service type (CS service, PS domain service) and the measurement quantity
(CPICH Ec/No or RSCP) in the coverage-based handover, TUsed2b can be configured
through the following parameters.
If the event 2D with the CPICH RSCP value is received by the RNC,
TUsed2b of event 2B with the CPICH RSCP value can be:

Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD
TUsed2b of event 2B with the CPICH Ec/No value is configured as the maximum value 0
dB according to 3GPP specification.
If the event 2D with the CPICH Ec/No value is received by the RNC,
TUsed2b of event 2B with the CPICH Ec/No value can be：

Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Inter-freq R99 PS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD
TUsed2b of event 2B with the CPICH RSCP value is configured as the maximum
value -25 dB according to 3GPP specification.
H2b is the event 2B hysteresis value 2B hysteresis.
151
Handover
z Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Parameter ID: TargetFreqCsThdEcN0
The default value of this parameter is –12 dB
z Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD

Parameter ID: UsedFreqCSThdEcN0
z Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Parameter ID: TargetFreqCsThdEcN0

Value range :–24 to 0, step 1dB
Content: If the CS service inter-frequency handover uses the event-triggered measurement
report mode, event 2B may be triggered when the Ec/No value of the target frequency is
higher than the threshold. In periodical measurement report mode, this parameter is used for
handover evaluation on the RNC side.
z Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Parameter ID: UsedFreqCSThdEcN0

Content: If the CS service inter-frequency handover uses the event-triggered measurement
report mode, event 2B may be triggered when the Ec/No value of the used frequency is lower
than the threshold.

z Event 2B is triggered only when the two necessary conditions are met at the same time.
152
handover
z 2B Event default setting
Target cell Used cell
CS Ec/No threshold -12dB -12dB
PS Ec/No threshold -12dB -12dB
CS RSCP threshold -92dBm -92dBm
PS RSCP threshold -92dBm -92dBm
153
handover
z 2B hysteresis

Parameter ID: TimeToTrig2B
z 2B hysteresis
Value range :0 to 29 , step 0.5dB
Content: This parameter specifies the event 2B trigger hysteresis, which is related
triggered in time.

Parameter ID: TimeToTrig2B
Value range D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320,
D640, D1280, D2560, D5000
Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 2B trigger delay, which is
related to slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the
probability of misjudgment. In this case, however, the event responds to the changes
of measured signals at a lower speed.
154
Handover Decision and Execution
Periodical Measurement Report Mode
Event-Triggered Measurement Report Mode
The coverage-based handover decision is categorized into two types according to the
following two measurement report modes: periodical measurement report mode
and event-triggered measurement report mode. Each mode corresponds to a
different decision and execution procedure.
155
Based on the event 2B measurement reports of CPICH RSCP and

event 2B CPICH Ec/No of the inter-frequency cell
RNC process the report by following procedure:

Add all the pilot cells that trigger event 2B to a cell set and arrange the cells
according to the measurement quality of CPICH_Ec/No in descending
order.
Select the cells in turn from the cell set to perform inter-frequency handover.
156
Both the CPICH Ec/No value and CPICH RSCP

value of the pilot signal of the target cell must meet
the requirement
Mother_Freq + CIOother_Freq ≥ Tother_Freq + H/2
NOTE: No consideration of the current cell
Mother_Freq is the CPICH Ec/No or CPICH RSCP measurement value of the

target cell reported by the UE. Both of the two measurement values of the
inter-frequency cell must satisfy the formula.
CIOother_Freq is the cell individual offset value of the target cell. It is equal to
the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and Neigbhoring cell
oriented CIO.
Tother_Freq is the decision threshold of inter-frequency hard handover.
Based on the service type (CS or PS service) and measurement quantity (CPICH
Ec/No or CPICH RSCP), this threshold can be configured through the following
parameters:
Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD

Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Inter-freq H target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger RSCP THD
Inter-freq H target frequency trigger RSCP THD
NOTE:
These thresholds are the same as the quality threshold of event 2B.
H is the inter-frequency hard handover hysteresis value HHO hysteresis.
157
Decide whether both the CPICH Ec/No value and CPICH RSCP value of
the pilot signal of the target cell meet the requirement of inter-frequency
handover.
Start the hard handover time-to-trigger timer, which is configured through
the parameter HHO period trigger delay time.
Select the cells in sequence, that is, from high quality cells to low quality
ones, to initiate inter-frequency handover in the cells where the hard
handover time-to-trigger timer expires.
158

Parameter ID: CIO
z Neigbhoring cell oriented CIO

z HHO hysteresis
Parameter ID: HystForPrdInterFreq
zCell oriented Cell Individual Offset
Parameter ID: CIO
Content: This parameter is used together with Neighboring cell oriented CIO. The sum of the
two parameter values is added to the measurement quantity before the UE evaluates whether
an event occurred. In handover algorithms, this parameter is used for moving the border of a
cell.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP/MOD CELLSETUP
zNeigbhoring cell oriented CIO

Value range :–20 to +20 , step:0.5dB
Content: The sum of the value of this parameter and the Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset specifies
the offset of the cell CPICH measurement value. In handover algorithms, this parameter is used for
moving the border of a cell.
INTERFREQHOCOV
zHHO hysteresis
Parameter ID: HystForPrdInterFreq
Value range 0 to 29 , step:0.5dB
Content: This parameter is used to evaluate the inter-frequency handover on the RNC side. The greater
the value of the parameter, the smaller the probability of the ping-pong effect and misjudgment. In this
case, however, the speed of response to handover is lower.
INTERFREQHOCOV
159
Contents
160
Procedure of QoS-based inter-frequency handover :
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover measurement,
handover decision, and handover execution.
Besides the triggering step, the rest 3 steps are the same with Coverage-based inter-frequency handover
If the service quality of the current cell deteriorates, the Link Stability Control Algorithm makes a handover
measurement decision.
The RNC requests the NodeB and the UE to start the compressed mode to measure the qualities of inter-
frequency neighboring cells. Then, the RNC sends inter-frequency measurement control messages.
In the measurement phase, the method of periodical measurement report or event-triggered measurement
report can be used.
After receiving the event 2B measurement reports of CPICH RSCP and CPICH Ec/No of the inter-
frequency cell, the RNC performs the handover. Otherwise, the UE periodically generates
measurement reports, and the RNC makes a decision after evaluation.
Note :
About “Link Stability Control Algorithm” :
When the uplink transmit power of the UE or downlink transmitted code power of the NodeB exceeds the
associated threshold :
z For AMR, a fixed sequence of rate downsizing, inter-frequency handover, and then inter-RAT handover
are performed,
z for VP ,Inter-handover handover are performed,
z For BE service, rate downsizing, inter-frequency handover, and then inter-RAT handover are performed
according to the configured sequence
161
z InterFreq Handover Switch based on Uplink Traffic AMR

Parameter ID: UlQoSAmrInterFreqHoSwitch
The default value of this parameter is NO
z InterFreq Handover Switch based on Downlink Traffic AMR

Parameter ID: DlQoSAmrInterFreqHoSwitch
zInterFreq Handover Switch based on Uplink/Downlink Traffic AMR

Parameter ID : UlQoSAmrInterFreqHoSwitch/ DlQoSAmrInterFreqHoSwitch
Value range NO, YES
Content: If the value of this parameter is YES, inter-frequency handover

can be executed on the basis of the downlink/uplink QoS of AMR services.
Set this parameter through SET QOSACT
162
z InterFreq Handover Switch based on Uplink Traffic VP

Parameter ID: UlQoSVPInterFreqHoSwitch
z InterFreq Handover Switch based on Downlink Traffic VP

Parameter ID: DlQoSVPInterFreqHoSwitch
zInterFreq Handover Switch based on Uplink/Downlink Traffic VP

Parameter ID : UlQoSVPInterFreqHoSwitch/ DlQoSVPInterFreqHoSwitch
Value range NO, YES
Content: If the value of this parameter is YES, inter-frequency handover

can be executed on the basis of the downlink/uplink QoS of VP services.
163
z First / Second / Third Uplink QOS Enhancement Action for Traffic BE

Parameter ID: BeUlAct1/ BeUlAct2/ BeUlAct3
The default value of this parameter is RateDegrade/ InterFreqHO/ InterRatHO
z First / Second / Third Downlink QOS Enhancement Action for Traffic BE

Parameter ID: BeDlAct1/ BeDlAct2/ BeDlAct3
Parameter ID : BeUlAct1/ BeUlAct2/ BeUlAct3
Value range None, RateDegrade, InterFreqHO, InterRatHO

Content: This parameter defines the action sequence to enhance the

Uplink QoS of BE services .
Parameter ID : BeDlAct1/ BeDlAct2/ BeDlAct3

Content: This parameter defines the action sequence to enhance the

downlink QoS of BE services .
164
z Down Link QoS Measure timer length

Parameter ID: DLQoSMcTimerLen
The default value of this parameter is 20 (20s)
z Up Link QoS Measure timer length

Parameter ID: UpQoSMcTimerLen

Parameter ID : DLQoSMcTimerLen
Value range 0 to 512 ,step 1s
frequency handover based on downlink QoS. This parameter has no effect on the inter-
frequency measurement based on coverage.
If no QoS-based inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiry of the

downlink inter-frequency measurement timer, the RNC stops the QoS-based
inter-frequency measurement.
QoS-based measurement timer.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLQOSHO/MOD CELLQOSHO/SET QOSHO

Parameter ID : UpQoSMcTimerLen
Value range 0 to 512 ,step 1s
frequency handover based on uplink QoS. This parameter has no effect on the inter-
frequency measurement based on coverage.
If no QoS-based inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiry of the uplink

inter-frequency measurement timer, the RNC stops the inter-frequency
measurement and disables the compressed mode.
QoS-based measurement timer. .
165
Contents
166
Procedure of Load-based inter-frequency
handover :
The handover procedure is divided into three phases: handover triggering, handover
decision, and handover execution
There is no measurement of the target cell, so we call it blind handover.
The Load Reshuffling (LDR) module directly determines whether the current cell is
overloaded and whether an inter-frequency handover needs to be performed. The
LDR module provides the target cell information for the current cell, and the RNC
performs the handover procedure.
The RNC decides to trigger an inter-frequency blind handover if If the blind
handover neighbors are configured :
After the inter-frequency handover is triggered, the RNC chooses a decision
algorithm according to whether the conditions “Blind handover condition” of
direct blind handover are met.
If the value of the parameter of a cell is -115, the RNC performs direct
blind handover to this cell.
If there is no such cell with the parameter value -115, the RNC initiates
an intra-frequency measurement for conditional blind handover.
The RNC performs the blind handover according to the decision result.
167
Load-based inter-frequency handover
Handover triggering
z Target user
User with lower integrated priority
z Target cell
Blind handover neighbor
Based on the service ARP, Traffic class, Channel type(R99, HSDPA), RNC will
choose the users with lower priority to execute handover .
The target cell of this inter-frequency handover are only the blind handover neighbors
with light load.which is indicated by the “Blind handover flag”
168
z Blind handover flag

Parameter ID: BlindHOFlag
The default value of this parameter is False
zCell oriented Cell Individual Offset

Parameter ID : BlindHOFlag
Value range FALSE, TRUE
Content: This parameter indicates whether the neighboring cell is the

target cell for blind handovers. If the value is TRUE, blind handovers can be
performed to the neighboring cell.
Set this parameter through ADD INTERFREQNCELL/MOD
INTERFREQNCELL
169
z The RNC determines to trigger an inter-frequency blind handover
z RNC performs direct blind handover or conditional blind handover
After the RNC determines to trigger an inter-frequency blind handover ,according to

the parameter Blind handover condition, the RNC executes:
If the value of the parameter of a cell is -115, the RNC performs direct blind
handover to this cell.
If there is no such cell with the parameter value -115, the RNC initiates an
intra-frequency measurement for conditional blind handover.
Note:
If the neighboring cells have the same Blind handover condition value, the
RNC chooses any one of them.
170
z Conditional Blind Handover
The inter-frequency cells with the same coverage area have the same CPICH
RSCP values. By measuring the CPICH RSCP of the current cell, the quality
of the cells with the same coverage area can be determined, which increases
the probability of successful blind handover
The intra-frequency measurement for conditional blind handover is described as follows:

1.The RNC initializes the timer of intra-frequency measurement for blind handover. The timer
is specified by internal algorithm and needn't to be configured.
2. The RNC modifies the measurement mode:
The measurement reporting mode is changed to periodic reporting by a new

measurement control . The reporting period is Intrafrequency measurement
report interval of blind handover. The measurement reporting number is
Intrafrequency measurement report amount of blind handover.The intra-
frequency measurement quantity is CPICH RSCP.
3. After receiving from the UE the intra-frequency measurement reports for conditional blind
handover, the RNC checks whether the following condition is met:
CPICH RSCP of the cell in the measurement report >= Blind handover condition
If the condition is met, the RNC increments the counter of the number of intra-
frequency measurement reports for blind handover by 1. If the condition is not met,
the RNC does not perform a blind handover to the cell that triggers LDR and stops
intra-frequency measurement for blind handover.
When the counter reaches the value of Intrafrequency measurement report
amount of blind handover, the RNC initiates a blind handover to the cell that
triggers LDR.
If the counter does not reach this value, the RNC waits for the next intra-frequency
measurement report from the UE.
If the timer of intra-frequency measurement for blind handover expires, the RNC
does not perform a blind handover to the cell that triggers LDR and stops intra-
frequency handover for blind handover.
171
z Blind handover condition

Parameter ID: BlindHOQualityCondition
The default value of this parameter is -92 (-92dBm)
z Intrafrequency measurement report interval of blind handover

Parameter ID: BlindHOIntrafreqMRInterval
z Intrafrequency measurement report amount of blind handover

Parameter ID: BlindHOIntrafreqMRAmount
z Blind handover condition

Parameter ID : BlindHOQualityCondition
Value range -115 to -25 , step:1dB
Content: This parameter specifies whether the cell supports a direct or conditional blind
handover.
The value -115 indicates that the cell supports a direct blind handover. This
value is usually used in configuration of inter-frequency cells with large
coverage areas overlapped.
The other values indicate that the cell supports a conditional blind handover.
This value is usually used in configuration of inter-frequency cells with some
coverage areas overlapped.
Set this parameter through ADD INTERFREQNCELL/MOD INTERFREQNCELL
z Intrafrequency measurement report interval of blind handover
Parameter ID: BlindHOIntrafreqMRInterval
Value range D250, D500
Content: This parameter specifies the intra-frequency measurement period for blind
handover.
z Intrafrequency measurement report amount of blind handover
Parameter ID: BlindHOIntrafreqMRAmount
Value range D1, D2, D4, D8
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of intra-frequency measurement
reports for blind handover
172
Contents
173
Procedure of Speed-based inter-frequency handover :
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover measurement
handover decision, and handover execution
The RNC receives the internal handover request according to the HCS speed estimation. The
handover based on HCS speed estimation is of two types:
When the UE is in low-speed state, RNC will trigger handover from the macro cell to the micro
cell.
When the UE is in high-speed state, RNC will trigger handover from the micro cell to the macro
cell.
For different types of handover, the RNC acts differently.
If the handover is performed from a macro cell to a micro cell, the RNC triggers compressed
mode ,then sends an inter-frequency measurement control message for 2C event to start the
inter-frequency measurement procedure
If the handover is performed from a micro cell to a macro cell, the RNC directly performs blind
handover, without measurement procedure. only if the handover fails, the RNC triggers
compressed mode ,then sends an inter-frequency measurement control message for 2C event
to start the inter-frequency measurement procedure
For handover from a macro cell to a micro cell, after the UE reports event 2C, the RNC performs the
handover decision.
The RNC initiates a handover procedure.
If the handover is performed from a micro cell to a macro cell and the target cell of blind
handover is configured, the RNC performs blind handover to the target cell.
If the blind handover fails or the handover is performed from a macro cell to a micro cell, the
RNC performs the inter-frequency handover procedure to the cell with the best quality after 174
receiving event 2C from the UE.
Speed-based inter-frequency handover
MEASUREMENT EVENTS
Event Description
2C The estimated quality of a non-used frequency is above a certain

threshold.
Event 2C is only used in Speed-based inter-frequency handover.
After RNC believe the UE is in low-speed state, RNC will start handover from the macro
cell to the micro cell.
RNC triggers compressed mode firstly, then sends an inter-frequency measurement

control message for 2C event to start the inter-frequency measurement procedure.
175
Speed-based inter-frequency handover
2C EVENT
QNoused >= TNoused2c + H2c/2
2C only takes the Ec/No as the measurement quantity
QNoused is the measured quality of the cell that uses the other frequencies.
TNoused2c is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the other
frequencies, namely, Inter-freq measure target frequency trigger Ec/No THD.
H2c is the event 2C hysteresis value 2C hysteresis.
2C event trigger delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 2C

measurement report message.
2C Event only takes the Ec/No as the measurement quantity.
176
z Inter-freq measure target frequency trigger Ec/No THD

Parameter ID: InterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0
The default value of this parameter is -16 (-16dB)
z 2C hysteresis

z Inter-freq measure target frequency trigger Ec/No THD

Parameter ID : InterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0
Value range -24 to 0, step:1dB
The default value of this parameter is -16 (-16dB),
Content: When the Ec/No value of the target frequency is higher than the threshold, event
2C can be triggered
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERFREQHONCOV/MOD
CELLINTERFREQHONCOV/SET INTERFREQHONCOV
z 2C hysteresis
Value range 0 to 29
The default value of this parameter is 6(3dB)
Content: This parameter specifies the event 2C trigger hysteresis, which is related to slow
fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of ping-pong effect
and misjudgment. In this case, however, the event cannot be triggered in time.
Value range D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640,
D1280, D2560, D5000
Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 2C trigger delay, which is related to
slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of
misjudgment. In this case, however, the event responds to the changes of measured signals
at a lower speed.
177
Contents
178
Blind handover Based on Event 1F
Blind Handover
z Handover without measuring the neighboring cell
Load-based handover
Speed-based handover from micro cell to macro cell
1F event triggered inter-frequency handover
Blind handover is a special handover, means :before the handover, the UE needn’t
report the target cell signal quality, RNC just select a target inter-frequency or inter-
rat neighbor for the UE ,then force the UE handover to the target, the compressed
mode and inter-frequency measurement can be overleaped
The precondition of blind handover is :the blind handover neighbors are configured to
a cell (Blind handover flag ), which is discussed in the forenamed slides.
Blind handover may be triggered by load, UE speed and also the 1F event
179
MEASUREMENT EVENTS
Event Description
1F A Primary CPICH becomes worse than an absolute threshold.
1F Event is a intra-frequency measurement event, like 1A,1B,1C,1D.
Events 1A,1B,1C,1D are used to trigger intra-frequency handover, Event 1F only trigger
inter-frequency or inter-RAT blind handover.
180
1F EVENT
z Event 1F is triggered on the basis of the following formula
MOld <= T1f - H1f/2
MOld is the measurement value of the cell that becomes worse.
T1f is an absolute threshold. It is set to 1F event absolute EcNo threshold or 1F

event absolute RSCP threshold respectively, depending on the measurement
quantity.
After the conditions of event 1F are fulfilled and maintained until the 1F event
trigger delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 1F measurement report
message.
181
z 1F event absolute EcNo threshold

Parameter ID: IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo
z 1F event absolute RSCP threshold

Parameter ID: IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP
z 1F event absolute EcNo threshold
Parameter ID : IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo
Value range -24 to 0, step:1dB

The default value of this parameter is -24 (-24dB),
Content: This parameter specifies the absolute EcNo threshold of event 1F. The
greater the parameter value is, the more easily event 1F is triggered. The smaller the
parameter value is, the harder event 1F is triggered.

1F event absolute RSCP threshold

•Parameter ID: IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP
Value range -115 to -25 step:1dB
The default value of this parameter is -115(-115dBm)
Content: This parameter specifies the absolute RSCP threshold of event 1F. The
greater the parameter value is, the more easily event 1F is triggered. The smaller the
parameter value is, the harder event 1F is triggered.

182
z 1F hysteresis
Parameter ID: HystFor1F

Parameter ID: TrigTime1F
z 1F hysteresis
Parameter ID : HystFor1F
Value range 0 to 15, step:0.5dB
The default value of this parameter is 8 (4dB),
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event 1D. It is related to the slow
fading characteristic. The greater the parameter value is, the smaller the probability of ping-
pong effect and misjudgment. In this case, however, the event cannot be triggered in time.

CELLINTRAFREQHO
•1F event trigger delay time

•Parameter ID: TrigTime1F
D1280, D2560, D5000
Content: This parameter specifies the trigger delay time of event 1F. It is related to the slow
fading characteristic. The greater the parameter value is, the smaller the misjudgment
probability, but the slower the response of the event to the measured signal changes.

183
Contents
184
Inter-frequency Anti-PingPong
z The inter-frequency anti-ping-pong algorithm is as follows:
Step1-When a coverage-based inter-frequency handover or an inter-frequency
blind handover based on event 1F occurs, the RNC starts the timer specified
by The timer length of anti ping-pong NCOV interfreq handover for the UE
Step2-When a non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover is triggered, first,
the RNC determines whether the timer specified by The timer length of anti
ping-pong NCOV interfreq handover expires
If the timer does not expire, the RNC cancels the handover
If the timer expires, the RNC performs the handover
z Parameters
The timer length of anti pingpong NCOV interfreq handover
Parameter ID: 1FAntiPingPongtimerLength
The default value of this parameter is 30s
z The timer length of anti pingpong NCOV interfreq handover

Parameter ID :IFAntiPingpangTimerLength
Value range:0~120
Physical unit:s
Content: the length of anti non-coverage based inter-frequency pingpong handover timer.
Recommended value:30 Set this parameter through SET HOCOMM
185
Contents
186
Inter-frequency handover retry
z If an inter-frequency handover
based on event-triggered Handover
is failed
measurement report mode fails, the
RNC initiates the inter-frequency
handover attempt according to an
inter-frequency retry algorithm
Retry condition
z After the inter-frequency handover is satisfied?
fails, the retry timer for the cell is
started. After the retry timer expires,
2B event? Start timer
the UE makes a handover attempt
to the cell again until the retry
number exceeds the maximum
allowed retry number. If the
handover succeeds or two new END Timer is
expired
event 2B reports are received, the
periodical retry is stopped.
Trigger
handover
2B measurement
control is
re-transmitted
implementation
z For the inter-frequency handover based on coverage or QoS, the following two parameters
determine the retry period and the maximum number of retry times:
2B event retry period
2B event retry max times
z For the inter-frequency handover based on speed, the following two parameters determine the
retry period and the maximum number of retry times:
2C event retry period
2C event retry max times
187
Inter-frequency handover retry
z Parameters
2B event retry period
Parameter ID: PeriodFor2B
The default value of this parameter is 500ms
2B event retry max times

Parameter ID: AmntOfRpt2B
The default value of this parameter is 63 (infinity)

Parameter ID: PeriodFor2C

Parameter ID: AmntOfRpt2C
z 2B event retry period
z 2B event retry max times
Set above parameters through SET INTRERFREQHOCOV / ADD

CELLINTERFREQHOCOV / MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV
z 2C event retry period
z 2C event retry max times
Set above parameters through SET INTRERFREQHONCOV / ADD

CELLINTERFREQHONCOV / MOD CELLINTERFREQHONCOV
188
Contents
189
Intra-RNC Inter-Frequency Handover
190
Inter-RNC Inter-Frequency Handover
191
Contents
192
Contents
1. Inter-RAT Handover Overview
2. Inter-RAT Handover Procedure
3. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover
193
Inter-RAT Handover Overview
Inter-RAT Handover Application Scenario
z Inter-RAT handover provides coverage expansion, load sharing, and layered services.
It saves cost by utilizing the existing GSM network resources.
z Inter-RAT handover refers to the handover between UMTS and GSM. The reason for
the handover can be coverage limitation, link stability control or load limitation of the
3G system.
z Inter-RAT handover can be UMTS-to-GSM or GSM-to-UMTS handover.
z Strategy of 2G and 3G cooperation is shown in the picture:
Based on coverage, QoS , Service, load and speed, RNC can trigger UE
handover from 3G to 2G; When UE return back to Idle Mode, trigger UE Cell
reselect to 3G.
z In this handover, however, GSM and UMTS dual-mode UEs (MSs) are required, and
both the GSM MSC and the GSM BSS must be upgraded.
194
Classification of Inter-RAT Handover:

z Based on the triggering causes of handover, inter-frequency
handover can be categorized into four types .
Coverage-based
QoS-based
Load-based
Service-based
Speed-based
z Coverage-based inter-frequency handover

The coverage of the UMTS is incontinuous at the initial stage of the 3G network. On
the border of the coverage, the poor signal quality of UMTS triggers the UMTS-to-GSM
measurement. If the signal quality of GSM is good enough and all the services of the
UE are supported by the GSM, the coverage-based UMTS-to-GSM handover is
triggered.
z QoS-based inter-frequency handover
According to the Link Stability Control Algorithm, the RNC needs to trigger the QoS-
based UMTS-to-GSM handover to avoid call drops.
z Load-based inter-frequency blind handover
If the load of the UMTS is heavy and all the RAB of a UE are supported by the GSM,
the load-based UMTS-to-GSM handover is triggered.
z Service-based UMTS-to-GSM handover
Based on layered services, the traffic of different classes is handed over to different
systems. For example, when an Adaptive Multi Rate (AMR) speech service is
requested, this service can be handed over to the GSM.
z Speed-based inter-frequency handover
When the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) is used, the cells are divided into different
layers on the basis of coverage. Typically, a marco cell has large coverage and low
priority, whereas a micro cell has small coverage and high priority.UMTS-to-GSM
handover can be triggered by the UE speed estimation algorithm of the HCS. A UE
moving at high speed is handed over to a cell with larger coverage to reduce the times
of handover, whereas a UE moving at low speed is handed over to a cell with smaller
coverage.
195
Preconditions for UMTS-to-GSM Handover :
z Service Handover Indicator
z Capabilities of Deciding UMTS-to-GSM Handover

GSM neighboring cell capability
service capability
UE capability
z Before handover, the RNC checks whether the preconditions meet the triggering requirements
of the UMTS-to-GSM handover. The preconditions include the service handover indicator,
GSM cell capability, service capability, and UE capability.
z The parameter Service handover indicator indicates the CN policy for the service handover
to the GSM. This parameter is indicated in the Radio Access Bearer (RAB) assignment
signaling assigned by the CN, or can be configured on the RNC side by ADD/MOD
TYPRABBASIC .
z Before deciding UMTS-to-GSM handover, the RNC considers GSM cell capability, service
capability and UE capability.
GSM cell capability could be “GSM”,”GPRS”,”EDGE”, it should be the real capability of

the GSM neighbor, and configured in RNC data base by LMT correctly
Service capability could be “GSM”,”GPRS”,”EDGE” also, it should be properly

configured in RNC data base by LMT
UE capability is reported by the UE itself in “RRC Setup Complete” message.
196
z Service Handover Indicator

HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM
HO_TO_GSM_SHALL_NOT_BE_PERFORM
Example of rules for indicator of UMTS-to-GSM handover based on load and service
Before handover, the RNC checks service handover indicator, This parameter is indicated in
the Radio Access Bearer (RAB) assignment signaling assigned by the CNThe service
handover indicators are as follows:
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM: means that the handover to the 2G network
is performed when 2G signals are available.
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM: means that the handover to the 2G
network is performed when 3G signals are weak but 2G signals are strong.
HO_TO_GSM_SHALL_NOT_BE_PERFORM: means that the handover to the 2G
network is not performed even when 3G signals are weak but 2G signals are strong.
197
z For the UE accessing combined services (with CS services), the RNC sets the
service handover indicator of the UE to that of the CS service, because the CS
service has the highest QoS priority.
z For the UE accessing combined services (with only PS services), the RNC sets the
service handover indicator of the UE to that of the PS service, which has the highest
QoS priority.
z If service handover indicators are not configured by the CN, each indictor can be set
to Service parameter index of a service on the RNC.
z Based on different service handover indicators .RNC may initiate different action, for
example, handover based on service are not not performed for the services whose
handover indicator is “HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM” or
“HO_TO_GSM_SHALL_NOT_BE_PERFORM”
198
z Capabilities of Deciding UMTS-to-GSM Handover

GSM neighboring cell capability
NO_CAPABILITY, GSM, GPRS, EDGE
Service required capability
GSM, GPRS, EDGE
UE capability
GSM, GPRS, or EDGE
Note:
For Service-Based UMTS-to-GSM Handover, there
is an additional switch on RNC
The rules for enabling UMTS-to-GSM handover are based on the parameter Service Handover
Indicator and the three types of capability parameters. The rules vary with different types of
inter-RAT handover , that is , the 4 factors will decide if the inter-RAT handover is allowed.
The rules are:
z Coverage-based and QoS-based UMTS-to-GSM handover
when Service Handover Indicator is set as follows:
In addition, the RNC initiates inter-RAT handover based on the following capabilities:
GSM cell capability (can be set on RNC)

Service required capability (can be set on RNC)
UE capability (reported from UE “RRC setup complete” message )
199
GSM neighboring cell with EDGE capability
Service capability (required by 2G)
UE Capability
EDGE GPRS GSM
EDGE Allowed Allowed Allowed
GPRS Allowed Allowed Allowed
GSM Not allowed Not allowed Allowed
Not supported by 2G Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed
GSM neighboring cell with GPRS capability

UE Capability
EDGE GPRS GSM
EDGE Allowed Allowed Allowed
GPRS Allowed Allowed Allowed
GSM neighboring cell with GSM capability

UE Capability
EDGE GPRS GSM
EDGE Not allowed Not allowed Allowed
GPRS Not allowed Not allowed Allowed
If the capability of all the GSM neighboring cells is "No

capability", the inter-RAT handover cannot be started.
200
z load-based UMTS-to-GSM handover
z service-based UMTS-to-GSM handover

The following switch are on:
Inter-RAT CS handover switch (service based)

Inter-RAT PS handover switch (service based)
In addition, the RNC initiates inter-RAT handover based on the following capabilities:
GSM cell capability (can be set on RNC)
Service required capability (can be set on RNC)
UE capability (reported from UE “RRC setup complete” message )
GSM neighboring cell with EDGE capability

UE Capability
EDGE GPRS GSM
EDGE
Allowed Allowed Allowed
GPRS Not allowed Allowed Allowed
GSM
Not allowed Not allowed Allowed
201
GSM neighboring cell with GPRS capability
UE Capability
EDGE GPRS GSM
EDGE Not allowed Allowed Allowed
GPRS Not allowed Allowed Allowed
GSM neighboring cell with GSM capability

UE Capability
EDGE GPRS GSM
EDGE Not allowed Not allowed Allowed
GPRS Not allowed Not allowed Allowed
If the capability of all the GSM neighboring cells is "No

capability", the inter-RAT handover cannot be started.
202
z Inter-RAT Handover RNC Algorithm Switch
INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH
Default value is ON
INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH
Default value is ON
These switches are the parameter values of Handover algorithm switch in the command SET
CORRMALGOSWITCH.
INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH
The switch decides whether the RNC will initiate inter-RAT

measurement to trigger inter-RAT handover of the PS domain
from the UTRAN.
INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH
The switch decides whether the RNC will initiate inter-RAT

measurement to trigger inter-RAT handover of the CS domain
from the UTRAN.
203
Contents
1. Coverage-based inter-RAT handover
2. QoS-based inter-RAT handover
3. Load-based inter-RAT handover
4. Service-based inter-RAT handover
5. UMTS-to-GSM Multimedia Fallback
6. PS UMTS-to-GSM Handover with NACC
7. UMTS-to-GSM Handover retry
204
Coverage-based inter-RAT handover
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover
The RNC sends a MEASUREEMNT CONTROL message to the UE, notifying the UE to
measure the current carrier quality. This message defines the reporting rules and thresholds
of events 2D and 2F. If the quality of the pilot signal in the current cell deteriorates, the CPICH
Ec/No or CPICH RSCP of the UMTS cell that the UE accesses is lower than the
corresponding threshold and the UE reports event 2D.
If the RNC receives a report of event 2D, the RNC may request the NodeB and UE to start the
compressed mode to measure the qualities of GSM cells. Then, the RNC may send an inter-
RAT measurement control message that defines the neighboring cell information, reporting
period, and reporting rule.
In the measurement phase, either periodical measurement report mode or event-triggered

measurement report mode can be used.
After the UE reports event 3A, the RNC makes a handover decision. Or, after the UE
periodically sends the measurement reports, the RNC evaluates the reports first and then
makes a handover decision.

205
MEASUREMENT EVENTS
Event Description
2D The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is below a certain

threshold.
2F The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is above a certain

threshold.
When the estimated quality of the currently used frequency is below a certain threshold,2D Event
will be triggered, Then RNC will initiate the compress Mode to start inter-frequency or inter-
RAT handover measurement.
During compress mode, if the the estimated quality of the currently used frequency is above a
certain threshold, 2F Event will be triggered, Then RNC will stop the compress Mode.
206
2D EVENT
QUsed <= TUsed2d - H2d/2
z QUsed is the measured quality of the used frequency.

z TUsed2d is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current frequency. Based on the
service type (CS , PS domain R99 service, or PS domain HSPA service) and measurement quantity
(CPICH Ec/No or RSCP), this threshold can be configured through one of the following parameters:
Inter-freq CS measure start Ec/No THD
Inter-freq R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD
Inter-freq H measure start Ec/No THD
Inter-freq CS measure start RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS measure start RSCP THD
Inter-freq H measure start RSCP THD
z H2d is the event 2D hysteresis value 2D hysteresis.
z After the conditions of event 2D are fulfilled and maintained until the parameter 2D event trigger
delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 2D measurement report message.
Note:
Any of the Ec/No and RSCP measurement result can trigger the 2D event.
207
Parameters of inter-RAT handover
z Inter-RAT CS measure start Ec/No THD

z Inter-RAT R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD
z Inter-RAT H measure start Ec/No THD

z Inter-RAT CS measure start RSCP THD
z Inter-RAT R99 PS measure start RSCP THD
z Inter-RAT H measure start RSCP THD
z 2D hysteresis
z The parameters for inter-RAT handover 2D are similar with inter-frequency handover.
zSet above parameters through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV/MOD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV/SET INTERRATHOCOV
208
2F EVENT
z Event 2F is triggered on the basis of the following formula
QUsed >= TUsed2d - H2d/2
TUsed2f is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current frequency. Based on
the service type (CS , PS domain R99 service or PS domain HSPA service) and
measurement quantity (CPICH Ec/No or RSCP), this threshold can be configured through
the following parameters:
Inter-freq CS measure stop Ec/No THD

Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop Ec/No THD
Inter-freq H measure stop Ec/No THD
Inter-freq CS measure stop RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop RSCP THD
Inter-freq H measure stop RSCP THD
After the conditions of event 2F are fulfilled and maintained until the parameter 2F event
trigger delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 2F measurement report message.
Note:
Any of the Ec/No and RSCP measurement result can trigger the 2F event.
209
z Inter-RAT H measure stop Ec/No THD
z Inter-RAT H measure stop RSCP THD
z 2F hysteresis
z The parameters for inter-RAT handover 2D are similar with inter-frequency handover.
zSet above parameters through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV/MOD
210
Interoperability Between Inter-RAT and Inter-Frequency Handover
z Inter-frequency measurement Measure

inter-frequency
2D, 2F Event neighbor?
Inter-frequency neighbor
z Inter-RAT measurement
2D, 2F Event
Inter-RAT neighbor
Measure inter-
RAT neighbor?
During the coverage-based and QoS-based UMTS-to-GSM handover, the measurements on

both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells can be made, which enables the cells
to provide continuous coverage and high quality.
The preconditions for the measurements are as follows:
Both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells are available.
Inter-freq and Inter-RAT coexist switch is set to SIMINTERFREQRAT.
If Inter-freq and Inter-RAT coexist switch is set as follows:
Inter-frequency measurement, which means that the RNC allows the UE to perform only
this type of measurement.
Inter-RAT measurement, which means that the RNC allows the UE to perform only this type
of measurement.
Concurrent inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurement, which means that the RNC allows
the UE to perform both types of measurement in compressed mode at the same time.
211
z Inter-freq and Inter-RAT coexist switch

Parameter ID: InterFreqRATSwitch
The default value of this parameter is SIMINTERFREQRAT
z InterFreq & InterRat coexist measure threshold choice

Parameter ID: CoexistMeasThdChoice
The default value of this parameter is

COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ
z Inter-freq and Inter-RAT coexist switch

Parameter ID : InterFreqRATSwitch
Value range INTERFREQ, INTERRAT, SIMINTERFREQRAT
The default value of this parameter is SIMINTERFREQRAT
Content: This parameter specifies the type of cells to be measured when inter-frequency and inter-
RAT adjacent cells coexist:
InterFreq: means that only the inter-frequency cells are measured and inter-frequency handover is
performed.
InterRAT: means that only the GSM cells are measured and inter-RAT handover is performed.
SimInterFreqRAT: means that both inter-frequency and inter-RAT cells are measured and inter-
frequency or inter-RAT handover is performed according to the type of the cell that first meets the
condition for handover decision. If only the inter-frequency cells or inter-RAT cells exist, the value of
this parameter is invalid
Set this parameter through ADD CELLHOCOMM/MOD CELLHOCOMM
During the concurrent inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurement, the values of the parameter
InterFreq & InterRat coexist measure threshold choice for events 2D and 2F are chosen as follows:
When the value COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ is chosen, the inter-frequency
measurement threshold for event 2D is used.
When the value COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT is chosen, the inter-RAT measurement
threshold for event 2D is used.
InterFreq & InterRat coexist measure threshold choice
•Parameter ID: CoexistMeasThdChoice
Value range COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ,
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT
The default value of this parameter is COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ
Content: This parameter specifies the type of event 2D/2F measurement thresholds when inter-
frequency and inter-RAT adjacent cells coexist.
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ: represents the event 2D/2F measurement threshold
for the inter-frequency measurement.

COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT: represents the event 2D/2F measurement threshold
212
for the inter-RAT measurement.
Set this parameter through SET HOCOMM/ADD CELLHOCOMM/MOD CELLHOCOMM
UE RNC
Measurement report 2D
Physical Channel Recfg (CM)
Physical Channel Recfg Complet(CM)
Measurement control
When the UE enters the compress mode, RNC will trigger the inter-RAT handover measurement
by one additional measurement control signaling , so as to request UE test inter-RAT neighbor
cell.
In this Measurement control message, RNC should inform the UE inter-RAT measurement
parameter (Neighbor list, reporting mode…)
213
•Report Mode
RNC UE RNC
UE
Measurement control (Event triggering,
GSM RSSI ,WCDMA RSCP or Ec/No)
Measurement control (Periodical, RSSI)
Measurement report
Measurement report (3A)
Measurement report
Measurement report
Handover
Handover
Periodical_reporting Event_trigger
The measurement report mode of inter-RAT handover is configured through the parameter Inter-
frequency measure report mode. By default ,periodically reporting is recommended.
Based on the measurement control message received from the RNC, the UE periodically reports
the measurement quality of the target cell. Then, based on the measurement report, the RNC
makes the handover decision and performs handover.
If the reporting mode is periodically reporting : UE only test the inter-RAT neighbor RSSI only.
If the reporting mode is event trigger reporting : UE test the inter-RAT neighbor RSSI and current
cell Ec/No or RSCP ( depend on the 3A Measure Quantity ) .
214
z Inter-RAT report mode

Parameter ID: InterRATReportMode
z Inter-RAT period report interval

Parameter ID: InterRATPeriodReportInterval
z Inter-RAT report mode

Parameter ID: InterRATReportMode
Value range :Periodical reporting, Event trigger
Content: This parameter specifies the inter-frequency measurement report mode.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV/MOD
z Inter-RAT period report interval

Parameter ID: InterRATPeriodReportInterval
Value range : NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000, 8000,
12000, 16000, 20000, 24000, 28000, 32000, 64000
The default value of this parameter is 1000 (500ms)
Content: This parameter specifies the interval of the inter-frequency measurement report.
215
z Inter-RAT measure timer length

Parameter ID: InterRATMeasTime
The default value of this parameter is 60 (60 s)
z 3A Measure Quantity
Parameter ID: MeasQuantityOf3A
The default value of this parameter is Auto (based on the 2D)

Value range : 0 to 512 ,step 1s
Content: If no inter-RAT handover occurs upon expiry of the inter-RAT measurement timer,
the system stops the inter-RAT measurement and disables the compressed mode. If this
parameter is 0, the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer.
Set this parameter for handover based on coverage through ADD
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET INTERFREQHOCOV
z 3A Measure Quantity
Parameter ID: MeasQuantityOf3A
Value range : CPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP, Auto
The default value of this parameter is Auto (based on the 2D)
Content: This parameter indicates the measurement value of the coverage-based inter-RAT
measurement in event-triggered measurement report mode.
When 3A Measure Quantity is set to Auto, the measure quantity of the used UTRAN
frequency is chosen the same as the measure quantity of the reporting 2D event that
triggered this inter-RAT measurement.
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET INTERRATHOCOV
This parameter can be configured only when Inter-RAT report mode is set to
EVENT_TRIGGER.
216
z Handover measurement
Event 3A is triggered on the basis of the following formula:
– QUsed <= TUsed - H3a/2
– MOtherRAT + CIOOtherRAT >= TOtherRAT + H3a/2
z QUsed is the measurement value of the cell at the currently used frequency.
z TUsed is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current frequency.
217
z Inter-RAT CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD

Parameter ID: UsedFreqCsThdEcN0
z Inter-RAT CS handover decision THD

Parameter ID: TargetRatCsThd
The default value of this parameter is 16 (-95 dBm)
z Inter-RAT CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Parameter ID: UsedFreqCsThdEcN0

Content: If CS service inter-RAT handover uses the event-triggered measurement report

mode, event 3A is triggered only when the Ec/No value of the used frequency is lower than
this threshold.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV/MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV/SET
INTERRATHOCOV
Parameter ID: TargetRatCsThd
Value range :0 to 63, step 1dB
The default value of this parameter is 16 (-95 dBm)
Content: This parameter indicates the requirement of CS service inter-RAT handover for the
quality of inter-RAT cells.
If the event-triggered measurement report mode is used, event 3A may be triggered when
the quality of the target frequency is higher than this threshold. In periodical measurement
report mode, this parameter is used to evaluate the coverage-based inter-RAT handover on
the RNC side.
The value 0 means that the physical value is smaller than –110 dBm. .

INTERRATHOCOV
218
3A Event default setting
Used cell Target cell
CS Ec/No threshold -12dB -95dBm
PS Ec/No threshold -13dB
H Ec/No threshold -13dB
CS RSCP threshold -97dBm -95dBm
PS RSCP threshold -107dBm
H RSCP threshold -107dBm
219
z 3A hysteresis
The default value of this parameter is 4(2 dB)

z 3A hysteresis
Value range 0 to 15 , step 0.5dB

The default value of this parameter is 4 (2 dB)
Content: This parameter specifies the event 3A trigger hysteresis, which is related to
slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of
triggered in time .

Value range :D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320,
D640, D1280, D2560, D5000
The default value of this parameter is 0 ( 0ms )
Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 3A trigger delay, which is related
misjudgment. In this case, however, the event responds to the changes of measured
signals at a lower speed.
220
z Cell Individual Offset

Parameter ID: CIO
The default value of this parameter is 0 dB
z Neigbhoring cell oriented CIO

zCell Individual Offset

Parameter ID: CIO
Value range –50 to 50 , step 1dB
Content: This parameter cooperates with the Neighboring cell oriented CIO
in inter-RAT handover decision. The larger the sum, the higher the handover
priority of the GSM cell. The smaller the sum, the lower the handover priority
of the GSM cell.
Set this parameter through ADD GSMCELL/MOD GSMCELL
zNeigbhoring cell oriented CIO

Value range :–50 to 50 , step 1dB
The default value of this parameter is 0 (0 dB)
Content: This parameter is used in inter-RAT handover decision. The larger

the parameter, the higher the handover priority of the GSM cell. The smaller
the parameter, the lower the handover priority of the GSM cell .
Set this parameter through ADD GSMNCELL/MOD GSMNCELL
221
Coverage-based Inter-RAT handover
The coverage-based handover decision is categorized into two types according to the
following two measurement report modes: periodical measurement report mode and
event-triggered measurement report mode. Each mode corresponds to a different decision
and execution procedure.
222
z Handover Decision and Execution

The target cell must meet the requirement
– Mother_RAT + CIOother_RAT ≥ Tother_RAT + H/2
NOTE: No consideration of the current cell
z Mother_RAT is the measurement result of inter-RAT handover received by the RNC.
z CIOother_RAT is the cell individual offset value of the target cell. It is equal to the sum of Cell
oriented Cell Individual Offset and Neigbhoring cell oriented CIO. Neigbhoring cell oriented
CIO indicates the offset of the measurement cell relative to the best cell.
z Tother_RAT is the decision threshold of inter-RAT hard handover.
Based on the service type (CS or PS service) and measurement quantity (CPICH Ec/No or RSCP),
this threshold can be configured through the following parameters:
Inter-RAT CS handover decision THD

Inter-RAT R99 PS handover decision THD
Inter-RAT H handover decision THD
NOTE:
These thresholds are the same as the quality threshold of event 3A.
z For H is the inter-RAT handover hysteresis value Inter-RAT hysteresis.
z Select the cells in sequence, that is, from high quality cells to low quality ones, to initiate UMTS-to-
GSM handover in the cells where the handover time-to-trigger timer expires.
z The length of the time-to-trigger timer is configured through the parameter Time to trigger for
verified GSM cell (with BSIC acknowledged) or the parameter Time to trigger for non-verified
GSM cell (with BSIC unacknowledged).
223
z Time to trigger for verified GSM cell

Parameter ID: TimeToTrigForVerify
The default value of this parameter is 0 (0 ms)
z Time to trigger for non-verified GSM cell

Parameter ID: TimeToTrigForNonVerify
The default value of this parameter is 65535 (never)
z Inter-RAT hysteresis
Parameter ID: HystforInterRAT
z Time to trigger for verified GSM cell

Parameter ID : TimeToTrigForVerify
Value range 0 to 64000, step:1ms
The default value of this parameter is 0 (0 ms)
Content: This parameter specifies the delay time for triggering a GSM cell with BSIC acknowledged.
In the period specified by this parameter, if the signal quality of an adjacent GSM cell meets the
requirement of inter-RAT handover, and this cell is acknowledged, the network will start inter-RAT
handover.
INTERRATHOCOV
z Time to trigger for non-verified GSM cell
Parameter ID: TimeToTrigForNonVerify
Value range 0 to 64000 , 65535 , step:1ms
The default value of this parameter is 65535 (never)
Content: This parameter specifies the delay time for triggering a GSM cell with BSIC unacknowledged.
In the period specified by this parameter, if the signal quality of an adjacent GSM cell meets the
requirement of inter-RAT handover, and this cell is unacknowledged, the network will start inter-RAT
handover.
The value 65535 means that the RNC does not perform handover to an unacknowledged GSM cell. .
INTERRATHOCOV
z Inter-RAT hysteresis
Parameter ID: HystforInterRAT
Value range 0 to 15 , step:0.5dB
Content: This parameter determines whether to trigger inter-RAT handover decision together with the
quality threshold. The smaller the shadow fading, the smaller the value of this parameter.
224
INTERRATHOCOV
Based on the event 3A
After receiving the event 3A measurement report of GSM cells, the RNC performs the
following decision and execution procedures:
z Put all the GSM cells that trigger event 3A into a cell set and arrange the cells according
to the measurement quality in descending order.
z Select the cells in sequence from the cell set to perform inter-RAT handover.
225
Contents
226
Procedure of QoS-based inter-RAT handover :
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover measurement,
handover decision, and handover execution.
Besides the triggering step, the rest 3 steps are the same with Coverage-based inter-RAT handover
If the service quality of the current cell deteriorates, the Link Stability Control Algorithm makes a handover
measurement decision.
The RNC requests the NodeB and the UE to start the compressed mode to measure the qualities of inter-
frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells. Then, the RNC sends measurement control messages for
inter-frequency measurement and inter-RAT measurement
In the measurement phase, the method of periodical measurement report or event-triggered measurement
report can be used.
After the UE reports event 3A, the RNC performs the handover. Otherwise, the UE periodically
generates measurement reports, and the RNC makes a decision after evaluation.In the
execution phase
Note :
About “Link Stability Control Algorithm” :
When the uplink transmit power of the UE or downlink transmitted code power of the NodeB exceeds the
associated threshold :
z For AMR, a fixed sequence of rate downsizing, inter-frequency handover, and then inter-RAT handover
are performed,
z for VP ,inter-frequency handover are performed,
z For BE service, rate downsizing, inter-frequency handover, and then inter-RAT handover are performed
according to the configured sequence
227
Parameters of inRAT-frequency handover
z InterRAT Handover Switch based on Uplink Traffic AMR

Parameter ID: UlQoSAmrInterRATHoSwitch
z InterRAT Handover Switch based on Downlink Traffic AMR

Parameter ID: DlQoSAmrInterRATHoSwitch
zInterRAT Handover Switch based on Uplink/Downlink Traffic AMR

Parameter ID : UlQoSAmrInterRATHoSwitch/ DlQoSAmrInterRATHoSwitch
Value range NO, YES
Content: If the value of this parameter is YES, inter-RAT handover can be

executed on the basis of the downlink/uplink QoS of AMR services.
228

Parameter ID: BeUlAct1/ BeUlAct2/ BeUlAct3

Parameter ID: BeDlAct1/ BeDlAct2/ BeDlAct3
Parameter ID : BeUlAct1/ BeUlAct2/ BeUlAct3

Content: This parameter defines the action sequence to enhance the Uplink QoS of
BE services .
Parameter ID : BeDlAct1/ BeDlAct2/ BeDlAct3

Content: This parameter defines the action sequence to enhance the downlink QoS
of BE services .
229

Parameter ID: DLQoSMcTimerLen
z Up Link QoS Measure timer length

Parameter ID: UpQoSMcTimerLen
z 3A Used-Freq Measure Quantity for QoS

Parameter ID: UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQoS3A
The default value of this parameter is CPICH_RSCP
These two parameters are shared by QoS based inter-frequency and QoS based
inter-RAT handover:
Down Link QoS Measure timer length
Up Link QoS Measure timer length
Set these parameters through ADD CELLQOSHO/MOD CELLQOSHO/SET
QOSHO
z 3A Used-Freq Measure Quantity for QoS
Parameter ID : UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQoS3A
Value range CPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP
The default value of this parameter is CPICH_RSCP
Content: This parameter indicates the measurement quantity used in QoS-based
UMTS-to-GSM measurement in event-triggered reporting mode.
If the coverage and QoS-based UMTS-to-GSM handovers are triggered
simultaneously, the RNC distributes QoS-based measurement parameters.
230
Contents
231
Procedure of Load-based inter-RAT handover :
The handover procedure is divided into three phases: handover triggering, handover decision,
and handover execution
When the load of the UMTS cell that the UE accesses is higher than the related threshold, the
Load Reshuffling (LDR) algorithm makes a handover decision.
The RNC enables the compressed mode and starts the inter-RAT handover measurement.
After the UE reports event 3C, the RNC makes a handover decision.
Based on the service ARP, Traffic class, Channel type(R99, HSDPA), RNC will choose the users
with lower priority to execute handover .
232

The default value of this parameter is 60 s
Parameter ID : InterRATMeasTime
Value range 0 to 512
Content: If no inter-RAT handover occurs upon expiry of the inter-RAT

measurement timer, the system stops the inter-RAT measurement and disables the
compressed mode. If this parameter is 0, the system does not start the inter-RAT
measurement timer.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV/MOD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV/SET INTERRATHONCOV
233
Load-based inter-RAT handover
3C EVENT
MOtherRAT + CIOOtherRAT >= TOtherRAT + H3c/2
MOtherRAT is the measurement value of the cell (in another RAT) in the reporting range.
CIOOtherRAT is the cell individual offset value of the cell (in another RAT) in the reporting
range, which is equal to the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and Neighboring
cell oriented CIO.
TOtherRAT is the absolute inter-RAT handover threshold. Based on the service type (CS , PS
domain R99 service, or PS domain HSPA service), this threshold can be configured through
the following parameters:
Inter-RAT CS handover decision THD

Inter-RAT R99 PS handover decision THD
H3c is 3C hysteresis, the hysteresis value of event 3C.
For the PS and CS combined services, the threshold(s) for CS services is (are) used.
When the conditions for event 3C are met and the delay requirement specified by the 3C
event trigger delay time parameter can be satisfied, the UE sends the measurement
report of event 3C.
234

Parameter ID: InterRATNCovHOCSTh
The default value of this parameter is 21 (-90dBm)
z Inter-RAT PS handover decision THD

Parameter ID: InterRATNCovHOPSThd

Parameter ID : InterRATNCovHOCSTh
Value range 0 to 63 ,step:1dB
Content: This parameter is used to set measurement control on the event 3C. The
event 3C is triggered when the quality of the target frequency is higher than this
threshold. Note that the value 0 means the physical value is smaller than -110 dBm .
z Inter-RAT PS handover decision THD

Parameter ID : InterRATNCovHOPSTh
Value range 0 to 63 ,step:1dB
Content: This parameter is used to set measurement control on the event 3C. The
event 3C is triggered when the quality of the target frequency is higher than this
threshold. Note that the value 0 means the physical value is smaller than -110 dBm .
235
z 3C hysteresis

z 3C hysteresis
Parameter ID : Hystfor3C
Value range 0 to 15 ,step:0.5 dB

Content: This parameter specifies the event 3C trigger hysteresis, which is related to slow
fading . The larger the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of ping-pong effect
and decision mistakes. In this case, however, event 3C cannot be triggered in time .
Parameter ID : TrigTime3C
D1280, D2560, D5000
Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 3C trigger delay, which is related to
slow fading. The larger the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of decision
mistakes. In this case, however, event 3C responds to the changes of measured signals more
slowly.

236
Load-based inter-RAT handover
z Decision and Execution Procedure
Decision
3C Event
load information interchanging between the 3G and 2G cell
Execution
After receiving the event 3C measurement report of GSM cells, the RNC performs the
following handover decision and execution procedure:
Put all the GSM cells that trigger event 3C into a cell set and arrange the cells
according to the measurement quality in descending order.
Select the cells in sequence from the cell set.
The load status between the source cell and the target cell can be acquired by
interchanging load information between a UMTS cell and a GSM cell during the
load-based and service-based UMTS-to-GSM handover. Thus, whether to further
conduct the handover can be determined to avoid the 2G cell overload and
possible handover to the congested cell.
237
The procedure of load information interchanging between the 3G source cell and 2G target cell
is described as follows:
When the RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message to the 3G CN,
If the switch Send Load Info to GSM Ind is set to ON, the RELOCATION
REQUIRED message includes the load information of the 3G source cell.
If the switch Send Load Info to GSM Ind is set to OFF, then the RELOCATION
REQUIRED message does not include the Information
When the RNC receives the RELOCATION COMMAND message from the 2G CN,
If the switch NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load is set to ON, the RNC
obtains the load information of the 2G target cell by reading the RELOCATION
COMMAND message.
If the 2G load is lower than CS domain Reloc GSM load THD (for CS
service), or if the 2G load is lower than PS domain Reloc GSM load THD
(for PS service), the RNC continues the inter-RAT handover procedure;
otherwise, the RNC returns the RELOCATION CANCEL message to the
CN to cancel this inter-RAT handover and makes another handover
attempt to the next candidate cell generated in the cell list based on inter-
RAT measurement.
If the load information of the 2G target cell is not included in the
RELOCATION COMMAND message, the load information of the 2G target
cell is not considered and this inter-RAT handover is continued.
If the switch NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load is set to OFF, the RNC
continues the inter-RAT handover procedure without considering the thresholds.
238
z Send Load Info to GSM Ind

Parameter ID: SndLdInfo2GsmInd
The default value of this parameter is ON
z NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load

Parameter ID: NcovHoOn2GldInd
z Send Load Info to GSM Ind
Parameter ID : SndLdInfo2GsmInd
Value range ON, OFF

Content:
When the parameter is set to ON, the RNC sends UMTS cell load
information to the GSM CN during the non-coverage based system
relocation in or out process.
When the parameter is set to OFF, the RNC does not send UMTS cell load
information to the GSM during the system relocation in or out process.
Set this parameter through SET INTERRATHONCOV
z NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load
Parameter ID : NcovHoOn2GldInd
Value range ON, OFF

Content:
When the parameter is set to ON, the RNC stops the non-coverage
based system relocation out process if the GSM cell load exceeds the
CS dormain Reloc GSM load THD or PS dormain Reloc GSM load
THD.
When the parameter is set to OFF, the RNC continues the system
relocation out process without considering the thresholds. This
parameter specifies the time of event 3C trigger delay, which is related
to slow fading. The larger the value of this parameter, the smaller the
probability of decision mistakes. In this case, however, event 3C
responds to the changes of measured signals more slowly.
239
z CS domain Reloc GSM load THD

Parameter ID: CSHOOut2GLoadThd
The default value of this parameter is 80 (80%)
z PS domain Reloc GSM load THD

Parameter ID: PSHOOut2GLoadThd
z CS domain Reloc GSM load THD
Parameter ID : CSHOOut2GLoadThd
Value range 0 to 100 ,step:1%

Content:
z PS domain Reloc GSM load THD
Parameter ID : PSHOOut2GLoadThd
Value range 0 to 100 ,step:1%

Content:
240
z Inter-RAT handover max attempt times

Parameter ID: InterRATHOAttempts
z Inter-RAT handover max attempt times
Parameter ID : InterRATHOAttempts
Value range 1 to 16
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of attempts of load-based

and service-based inter-RAT handover.

CELLINTERRATHONCOV/SET INTERRATHONCOV
241
Contents
242
Procedure of Service-based inter-RAT handover :
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover measurement
handover decision, and handover execution
When a service is established (RAB Assignment ), If the Service Handover Indicator is set to
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM, the RNC requests the handover to the GSM
The RNC enables the compressed mode and starts the inter-RAT handover measurement.
After the UE reports event 3C, the RNC makes a handover decision.
z service type is defined by parameters on cell level:

Inter-RAT CS handover switch and Inter-RAT PS handover switch
When a single CS service is initially set up by the UE, the RNC allows the UMTS-to-GSM
service-based handover if Inter-RAT CS handover switch is set to ON.
When a single PS service is initially set up by the UE, the RNC allows the UMTS-to-GSM
service-based handover if Inter-RAT PS handover switch is set to ON.
For the CS and PS combined services, no service-based handover is trigged
z service handover indicator assigned by the Core Network. Only the services with the indicator
“HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM” can trigger Service-based inter-RAT handover
243
z Inter-RAT CS handover switch
z Inter-RAT PS handover switch
z Parameter ID:
CSServiceHOSwitch
PSServiceHOSwitch
z The default value of this parameter is OFF
z Inter-RAT CS handover switch
z Inter-RAT PS handover switch
Parameter ID :
CSServiceHOSwitch
PSServiceHOSwitch

Value range ON, OFF
Content:
This parameter indicates whether the cell allows the service-based
inter-RAT handover for the CS or PS services

Set this parameter through ADD CELLHOCOMM/MOD CELLHOCOMM
244
Contents
245
UMTS-to-GSM Multimedia Fallback
VP service: AMR service:

•speech •speech
•videos
WCDMA GSM
VP AMR AMR
Compared with the traditional speech service of the GSM, the VP service of the UMTS
can transmit not only speech services but also the images and videos captured by
both parties
For the UMTS-to-GSM handover, network-initiated multimedia fallback on the following

occasions:
z The RNC decides to send an inter-RAT handover request after receiving periodical
measurement reports or event 1F, 3A, or 3C.
z The service is combined with a VP, and the "Alternative RAB Para" in the RAB
ASSIGNMENT message is a valid AMR speech format.
246
Procedure of Multimedia Fallback
The procedure for the fallback service is described as follows:

z In the service set up stage, the CN sends the SRNC a RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT
REQUIREMENT message to set up the VP service. The message includes the "Alternative
RAB Para" that has QoS parameters required for setting up the speech service.
z During UMTS-to-GSM handover, the SRNC sends a RANAP MODIFY REQUEST message to
change the VP service to the AMR speech service. In the 3GPP R6 protocol, the Alternative
RAB Configuration is also added to the RAB MODIFY REQUEST message, which enables
the RNC to request the CN to change the VP service to the AMR speech service.
z The MSC initiates the Bearer Capability (BC) negotiation with the UE.
z After the negotiation is modified, the RNC is informed of performing service change. The
multimedia fallback ends when the service change is completed.
z When the multimedia fallback ends, the RNC decides whether to perform the UMTS-to-GSM
handover according to the current measurements reported by the UE.
At the beginning of the service setup, the RNC saves the RAB Para and "Alternative RAB Para"
in the RAB ASSIGNMENT or REQUEST RELOCATION REQUEST message. This makes
preparations for notifying the CN of changing the VP service to the AMR speech service.
The CN initiates the RAB reconfiguration to inform the two calling parties of performing the
multimedia fallback. The multimedia fallback of the calling party is consistent with that of the
called party. The single VP service falls back to the single AMR speech service. The multi-
RAB service combined with VP falls back to the multi-RAB service combined with AMR. If the
multimedia fallback succeeds, that is, the video phone in the service falls back to speech
successfully, the inter-RAT handover is initiated. Otherwise, the inter-RAT handover fails.
247
Contents
248
PS UMTS-to-GSM Handover with
NACC
z What is NACC?
Network Assisted Cell Change
z What is the use of NACC

To reduce the delay of PS UMTS-to-GSM handover
Normal PS is realized by cell reselection, the time delay can not be guaranteed. But
Some PS services have requirements for the delay. If the handover takes too long,
TCP may start slowly or data transmission of the stream service may be
interrupted due to the overflow of the UE buffer.
The introduction of NACC enables the system information exchange between BSS
and RAN , Thus the inter-system delay in PS domains, can be reduced.
With NACC, the RNC sends the cell change order to the UE, which contains the GSM
EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN) system information, when the UMTS-to-
GSM handover in the PS domain is triggered.
249
Procedure of NACC
After the SRNC receives a measurement report from the UE, the UE is reselected
to the GERAN cell according to the decision.
The SRNC sends a RAN INFORMATION REQUEST message to the SGSN.
The SGSN forwards the message to the corresponding BSS.
The BSS sends a GERAN SI/PSI message to the SRNC via the SGSN. RAN
INFORMATION message can either be On-demand (single report) or On-
modification (multiple reports).
The SGSN forwards the report message to the SRNC through Iu interface.
If there are several report messages, the SRNC terminates reporting by the
TERMINATION/END message.
To enable the NACC function, do as follows:
Run the SET CORRMALGOSWITCH command to set

PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH to ON.
Run the ADD GSMCELL/MOD GSMCELL command to set Inter-RAT cell

support RIM indicator to TRUE.
250
z PS 3G to 2G Cell change order NACC Switch

Parameter ID: PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH
z Inter-RAT cell support RIM indicator

Parameter ID: SuppRIMFlag
zPS 3G to 2G Cell change order NACC Switch

Parameter ID : PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH
Value range OFF, ON
Content: When it is checked, and inter-RAT handover of the PS domain

from UTRAN use cell change order method, inter-RAT handover support
NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) function.
zInter-RAT cell support RIM indicator

Parameter ID: SuppRIMFlag
Value range FALSE, TRUE
The default value of this parameter FALSE
Content: The parameter indicates whether the inter-RAT cell supports RIM.
Set this parameter through ADD GSMCELL/MOD GSMCELL
251
Contents
252
UMTS to GSM Handover Retry
z In case of event triggered inter-RAT handover failure, if the cause
of the failure is not a configuration failure and the retry timer
expires, the handover attempts to the cell again until the retry
number exceeds the maximum retry number
253
UMTS to GSM Handover Retry
z Parameters
3A event retry period
Parameter ID: PeriodFor3A
3A event retry max times

Parameter ID: AmntOfRpt3A
The default value of this parameter is 63 (infinity)

Parameter ID: PeriodFor3C

Parameter ID: AmntOfRpt3C
z 3A event retry period
z 3A event retry max times
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV / MOD

CELLINTERRATHOCOV / SET INTERRATHOCOV
z 3C event retry period
z 3C event retry max times
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV / MOD

CELLINTERRATHONCOV / SET INTERRATHONCOV
254
Contents
255
Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover
The signaling procedures for PS and CS inter-RAT handover

are different:
• UMTS-to-GSM Handover in CS Domain
• UMTS to GSM Handover in PS Domain
256
UMTS-to-GSM Handover in CS Domain
257
1. The SRNC sends the 3G MSC a RANAP message RELOCATION REQUIRED if

the condition of inter-RAT outgoing handover is met.
2. As indicated in the received message, the 3G MSC forwards this request to the 2G
MSC on the MAP/E interface through a MAP message PREPARE HANDOVER.
3. The 2G MSC forwards the request to the BSC. The message shown in the figure is
for reference only and is subject to the actual condition of the GSM.
4. The BSC responds to this request. The message shown in the figure is for reference
only and is subject to the actual condition of the GSM.
5. Once the initial procedures are completed in the 2G MSC/BSS, the 2G MSC returns
a MAP/E message PREPARE HANDOVER RESPONSE.
6. The 3G MSC sends the SRNC a RANAP message RELOCATION COMMAND.
7. The SRNC sends the UE an RRC message HANDOVER FROM UTRAN through
the existing RRC connection. This message may include information from one or
several other systems.
8. The BSC performs handover detection. The figure does not show such procedures
as GSM BSS synchronization. The message shown in the figure is for reference
only and is subject to the actual condition of the GSM.
9. The UE sends the BSC a HANDOVER COMPLETE message.
10. The BSC sends the MSC a HANDOVER COMPLETE message. The message
shown in the figure is for reference only and is subject to the actual condition of the
GSM.
11. After detecting the UE in the coverage area of the GSM, the MSC sends the CN a
MAP/E message SEND END SIGNAL REQUEST.
12. The CN sends the former SRNC an IU RELEASE COMMAND message, requesting
the former SRNC to release the allocated resource.
13. After the bearer resource is released in the UMTS, the former SRNC sends the CN
an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message.
14. After the call ends, the CN sends the MSC a MAP/E message SEND END SIGNAL
RESPONSE.
258
UMTS-to-GSM Handover in PS Domain
The signal quality of the WCDMA cell where the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load of
the serving cell is heavy.
When the UE is in CELL_DCH state, the UTRAN sends a CELL CHANGE ORDER message to
the UE to perform a handover to GSM by cell reselection.
The NodeB sends a RADIO LINK FAILURE INDICATION message, because the UE shuts down
transmission towards the WCDMA cell after cell reselection to a GSM cell.
After the UE accesses a GSM cell, the SGSN directly sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND
message to the SRNC, if the Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context does not need to be
transferred.
259
1. The UE in CELL_DCH state or the UTRAN (when the UE is in CELL_FACH state)

decides to initiate an inter-RAT handover in the PS domain to hand over the UE to a
new GSM cell and stop the data transmission between the UE and the network.
2. The UE sends a ROUTING AREA UPDATE REQUEST message to the 2G SGSN.
The Update Type in the message indicates RA update, combined RA/LA update, or
combined RA/LA update with IMSI attach. The BSS adds the CGI including the RAC
and LAC of the cell to the received message before forwarding the message to a
new 2G SGSN.
3. The new 2G SGSN sends an SGSN CONTEXT REQUEST message to the old 3G
SGSN to obtain the MM and PDP contexts. The old 3G SGSN validates the old P-
TMSI Signature. If the old P-TMSI Signature is valid, the old 3G SGSN starts a timer.
Otherwise, the old 3G SGSN responds with an error cause.
4. If the UE stays in connected mode before handover, the old 3G SGSN sends an
SRNS CONTEXT REQUEST message. After receiving this message, the SRNS
buffers the DPUs, stops sending the PDUs to the UE, and sends an SRNS
CONTEXT RESPONSE message to the old 3G SGSN.
5. The old 3G SGSN sends an SGSN CONTEXT RESPONSE message to the 2G
SGSN, including the MM and PDP contexts.
6. The security functions can be executed.
7. The new 2G SGSN sends an SGSN CONTEXT ACKNOWLEDGE message to the
old 3G SGSN. This informs the old 3G SGSN that the new 2G SGSN is ready to
receive the PDUs belonging to the activated PDP contexts.
8. The old 3G SGSN sends a DATA FORWARD COMMAND message to the SRNS.
The SRNS starts a data-forwarding timer and sends the buffered PDUs to the old
3G SGSN.
9. The old 3G SGSN tunnels the GTP PDUs to the new 2G SGSN. In the PDUs, the
sequence numbers in the GTP header remain unchanged.
10. The new 2G SGSN sends an UPDATE PDP CONTEXT REQUEST message to
each related GGSN. Each GGSN sends an UPDATE PDP CONTEXT RESPONSE
message after updating its PDP context fields.
11. The new 2G SGSN sends an UPDATE GPRS LOCATION message, requesting the
HLR to modify the SGSN number.
12. The HLR sends a CANCEL LOCATION message to the old 3G SGSN. The old 3G
SGSN responds with a CANCEL LOCATION ACK message. After the timer expires,
the old 3G SGSN removes the MM and PDP contexts.
13. The old 3G SGSN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNS. After
the data-forwarding timer expires, the SRNS responds with an IU RELEASE
COMPLETE message.
260
14. The HLR sends an INSERT SUBSCRIBER DATA message to the new 2G SGSN.
The 2G SGSN constructs an MM context and PDP contexts for the UE and returns
an INSERT SUBSCRIBER DATA ACK message to the HLR.
15. The HLR sends an UPDATE GPRS LOCATION ACK message to the new 2G
SGSN.
16. If the association has to be established, the new 2G SGSN sends a LOCATION
UPDATE REQUEST message to the VLR. The VLR stores the SGSN number for
creating or updating the association.
17. If the subscriber data in the VLR is marked as not confirmed by the HLR, the new
VLR informs the HLR. The HLR cancels the old VLR and inserts subscriber data in
the new VLR.
1. The new VLR sends an UPDATE LOCATION message to the HLR.

2. The HLR cancels the data in the old VLR by sending a CANCEL
LOCATION message to the old VLR.
3. The old VLR acknowledges the message by responding with a
CANCEL LOCATION ACK message.
4. The HLR sends an INSERT SUBSCRIBER DATA message to the
new VLR.
5. The new VLR acknowledges the message by responding with an
INSERT SUBSCRIBER DATA ACK message.
The HLR responds with a UPDATE LOCATION ACK message to the
6.
new VLR.
18. The new VLR allocates a new TMSI and responds with a LOCATION UPDATE
ACCEPT message to the 2G SGSN.
19. The new 2G SGSN checks the presence of the MS in the new RA. If all checks are
successful, the new 2G SGSN constructs the MM and PDP contexts for the MS. A
logical link is established between the new 2G SGSN and the UE. The 2G SGSN
responds to the UE with a ROUTING AREA UPDATE ACCEPT message.
20. The UE acknowledges the new P-TMSI by returning a ROUTING AREA UPDATE
COMPLETE message, including all PDUs successfully sent to the UE before the
routing area update procedure.
21. The new 2G SGSN sends a TMSI REALLOCATION COMPLETE message to the
new VLR if the UE confirms the VLR TMSI.
22. The 2G SGSN and the BSS perform the BSS PACKET FLOW CONTEXT
procedure.
261
Thank you
www.huawei.com
262
WCDMA Load Control
www.huawei.com
The WCDMA system is a self interference system. As the load of the WCDMA system
increases, the interference rises. A relatively high interference may affect the coverage
and Quality of Service (QoS) of established services. Therefore, capacity, coverage and
QoS of the WCDMA system are mutually affected. The purpose of load control is to
maximize the system capacity while ensuring coverage and QoS.
Objectives
Know load control principles
Know load control realization methods in WCDMA system
Know load control parameters in WCDMA system

Contents
1. Load Control Overview
2. Load Control Algorithms

Contents
1.1 Load Control Algorithms Overview
1.2 Load Measurement
1.3 Priorities Involved in Load Control

Load Definition
z Load: the occupancy of capacity
z Two kinds of capacity in WCDMA system

Hard capacity
Cell DL OVSF Code
NodeB Transport resource
NodeB processing capability (NodeB credit)
Soft capacity
Cell Power (UL and DL)
WCDMA network load can be defined by 4 factors:

1,Power ,include DL transmitting power of cell and increased UL interference (RTWP).
2,DL OVSF code of a cell
3,DL and UL NodeB processing capability which is defined by NodeB credit.
4,Iub transmission bandwidth of a NodeB
The power resource is related to the mobility, distribution of the UE and also effected by
the radio conditions. Therefore, for a fixed power resource, the numbers of service can
be supported is not a fix result. We believe the UL and DL power resources are soft.
The Objectives of Load Control
z Keeping system stable
z Maximizing system capacity while ensuring coverage and

QoS
z Realize different priorities for different service and different

user
WCDMA network load can be defined by 4 factors:

1,Power ,include DL transmitting power of cell and increased UL interference (RTWP).
2,DL OVSF code of a cell
3,DL and UL NodeB processing capability which is defined by NodeB credit.
4,Iub transmission bandwidth of a NodeB
The power resource is related to the mobility, distribution of the UE and also effected
by the radio conditions. Therefore, for a fixed power resource, the numbers of service
can be supported is not a fix result. We believe the UL and DL power resources are
soft.
Load Control Algorithms
z The load control algorithms are applied to the different
UE access phases as follows:
PUC: Potential User Control CAC: Call Admission Control

IAC: Intelligent Admission Control LDB : Intra-frequency Load Balancing
LDR: Load Reshuffling OLC: Overload Control
The load control algorithms are applied to the different UE access phases as follows:
Before UE access: Potential User Control (PUC)
During UE access: Intelligent Access Control (IAC) and Call Admission Control (CAC)
After UE access: intra-frequency Load Balancing (LDB), Load Reshuffling (LDR), and
Overload Control (OLC)
Load control algorithm in the WCDMA system
The load control algorithms are built into the RNC. The input of load control comes
from the RNC and measurement information of the NodeB.
RNC can calculate hard resource load, that is OVSF ,NodeB credit, Iub occupancy.
The soft load need the NodeB reporting.
Contents

Soft Load Measurement
The major measurement objects of the load measurement
Uplink Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP)

•
Received scheduled Enhanced Dedicated Channel (E-DCH)

UL Load
power share (RSEPS)
E-DCH Provided Bit Rate
TCP
Non-HSPA TCP
DL Load
HSDPA PBR
HSDPA GBP
The soft load control algorithms use load measurement values in the uplink and the
downlink. A common Load Measurement (LDM) algorithm is required to control load
measurement in the uplink and the downlink.
The NodeB and the RNC perform measurements and filtering in accordance with the
parameter settings. The statistics obtained after the measurements and filtering serve
as the data input for the load control algorithms.
The major measurement objects of the LDM are as follows:
Uplink Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP)
•Received scheduled Enhanced Dedicated Channel (E-DCH) power share (RSEPS)

•E-DCH Provided Bit Rate
Downlink Transmitted Carrier Power (TCP)
TCP of all codes not used for High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-
PDSCH), High Speed Shared Control Channel ， (Non-HSPA TCP)

Provided Bit Rate on HS-DSCH (PBR)
HS-DSCH required power ，also called Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) required power
(GBP)
Load Measurement procedure
z Smooth Window Filtering on the RNC Side

N −1

∑P n −i
N : the size of the smooth window

P ( n) = i =0
Pn : the reported measurement value
N
Based on the measurement parameters set on the NodeB Local Maintenance Terminal
(LMT), the NodeB measures the major measurement quantities and then obtains
original measurement values. After layer 3 filtering on the NodeB side, the NodeB
reports the cell measurement values to the RNC.
Based on the measurement parameters set on the RNC LMT, the RNC performs
smooth filtering on the measurement values reported from the NodeB and then obtains
the measurement values, which further serve as data input for the load control
algorithms.
Filtering on the NodeB Side
A is the sampling value of the measurement.

B is the measurement value after layer 1 filtering.
C is the measurement value after layer 3 filtering ,which is the reported measurement
value
Layer 1 filtering is not standardized by protocols and it depends on vendor equipment.

Layer 3 filtering is standardized. The filtering effect is controlled by a higher layer.
The interval at which the NodeB reports each measurement quantity to the RNC is
configured by the Time unit and Report cycle on RNC LMT: SET LDM
The report interval = Time unit * Report cycle
By default, Time unit for all measurement are set to 10ms ;Report cycle for
RTWP is 100, that is 1s; Report cycle for TCP and Non HSPA TCP is 20 ,that is
200ms ;Report cycle for HSDPA GBP is 10, that is 100 ms; Report cycle for
HSDPA PBR is 10, that is 100 ms
Smooth Window Filtering on the RNC Side

After the RNC receives the measurement report, it filters the measurement value
with the smooth window.
Assuming that the reported measurement value is Qn and that the size of the
smooth window is N, the filtered measurement value is :
Delay susceptibilities of PUC, CAC, LDB，LDR, and OLC to common measurement

are different. The LDM algorithm must apply different smooth filter coefficients and
measurement periods to those algorithms , on RNC LMT, we can set the smooth
window length for different algorithms by SET LDM:
The following table lists the parameters :
Value default
Parameter Name Parameter ID
Range Value
PUC moving average

PucAvgFilterLen 1 to 32 32
filter length
LDB moving average
LdbAvgFilterLen 1 to 32 32
filter length
UL LDR moving average

UlLdrAvgFilterLen 1 to 32 25
filter length
DL LDR moving average

DlLdrAvgFilterLen 1 to 32 25
filter length
UL CAC moving average

UlCACAvgFilterLen 1 to 32 3
filter length
DL CAC moving average

DlCACAvgFilterLen 1 to 32 3
filter length
UL OLC moving average

UlOLCAvgFilterLen 1 to 32 25
filter length
DL OLC moving average

DlOLCAvgFilterLen 1 to 32 25
filter length
Smooth window for GBP for all related algorithms are the same and the default setting is 1
Contents

Priority
z The service of user with low priority will be affected by the
load control algorithms first
z Three kinds of priorities

User Priority
RAB Integrate Priority
User Integrate Priority
User Priority: mainly applying to provide different QoS for different users. Eg., setting
different GBR according to the user priority for BE service. No consideration about the
service.
RAB Integrate Priority: Priority of a service, related to the service type, and the user
priority of the user.
User Integrate Priority: Only used for multi-RAB user ,it is a temporary priority of an
ongoing-service user.
User Priority
z There are three levels of user priority
gold (high), silver (middle) and copper (low) user
User priority Gold Silver Copper gold

user
Pay $100
Uplink 128kbps 64kbps 32kbps for 3G
services
Downlink 128kbps 64kbps 32kbps
In CN HLR, we can set ARP (Allocation Retention Priority ), during service setup, CN
sends ARP to RNC .Based on the mapping relation( configured in RNC), RNC can
identify the user is a gold, silver or copper one.
The user priority affect GBR of BE service in RAN, Iub transmission management and so
on.
User Priority
z The mapping relation between user priority and ARP
(Allocation/Retention Priority) is configured in RNC by SET
USERPRIORITY
The default relation is:
ARP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
User
Gold Silver Copper
Priority
The user priority mapping can be configured in RNC by SET USERPRIORITY

ARP 15 is always the lowest priority and it cannot be configured. It corresponds to
copper.
If ARP is not received in messages from the Iu interface, the user priority is regarded as
copper.
RAB Integrate Priority
z RAB Integrate Priority is mainly used in load control
algorithms
z RAB Integrate Priority are set according to :

ARP
Traffic Class
THP（for interactive service only）
HSPA or DCH
RAB Integrate Priority is mainly used in load control algorithms.

The values of RAB Integrate Priority are set according to the Integrate Priority
Configured Reference parameter as follows:
If Integrate Priority Configured Reference is set to Traffic Class, the integrate priority
abides by the following rules:
Traffic classes: conversational -> streaming -> interactive -> background =>
Services of the same class: Priority based on Allocation/Retention Priority (ARP)
values, that is, ARP1 -> ARP2 -> ARP3 -> ... -> ARP14 =>
Only for the interactive service of the same ARP value: priority based on Traffic
Handling Priority (THP, defined in CN , sent to RNC during service setup), that is,
THP1 -> THP2 -> THP3 -> ... -> THP14 =>
Services of the same ARP, class and THP (only for interactive services): High
Speed Packet Access (HSPA) or Dedicated Channel (DCH) service preferred
depending on the value of the Indicator of Carrier Type Priority parameter.
If Integrate Priority Configured Reference is set to ARP, the integrate priority abides by
the following rules:
ARP1 -> ARP2 -> ARP3 -> ... -> ARP14 =>
Traffic classes: conversational -> streaming -> interactive -> background =>
Only for the interactive service of the same ARP value: priority based on Traffic
Handling Priority (THP), that is, THP1 -> THP2 -> THP3 -> ... -> THP14 =>
Services of the same ARP, class and THP (only for interactive services): HSPA
or DCH service preferred depending on the value of the Indicator of Carrier
Type Priority parameter.
Integrate Priority Configured Reference and Indicator of Carrier Type
Priority are set by SET USERPRIORITY .
By default
Integrate Priority Configured Reference is set to ARP
Indicator of Carrier Type Priority is set to NONE, that means HSDPA and DCH
services have the same priority.
ARP and THP are carried in the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message, and they are
not configurable on the RNC LMT.
Example for RAB Integrate Priority
Based on ARP, HSDPA priority is higher
Service ARP Traffic Class Bear
ID type
Services attribution in the cell B 1 Interactive HSDPA

A 1 Interactive DCH
Service ARP Traffic Class Bear
ID type C 2 Conversational DCH
A 1 Interactive DCH D 2 Background DCH
B 1 Interactive HSDPA Based on Traffic Class, HSDPA priority is higher

C 2 Conversational DCH
Service Traffic Class ARP Bear
D 2 Background DCH ID type
C Conversational 2 DCH
B Interactive 1 HSDPA
A Interactive 1 DCH
D Background 2 DCH
This example shows the RAB Integrate Priority calculation in 2 different conditions
User Integrate Priority
z When the user has one RAB, User integrate priority is the
same as the RAB integrate priority
z For multiple RAB users, the integrate priority of the user is

based on the service of the highest priority
When the user has one RAB, User integrate priority is the same as the service of the
RAB integrate priority;
For multiple RAB users, the integrate priority of the user is based on the service of the
highest priority.
User integrate priority is used in user-specific load control. For example, the selection of
R99 users during preemption, the selection of users during inter-frequency load
handover for LDR, and the selection of users during switching BE services to CCH are
performed according to the user integrate priority.
Key parameters of Priority
z Integrate Priority Configured Reference
Parameter ID: PRIORITYREFERENCE
The default value of this parameter is ARP
z Indicator of Carrier Type Priority

Parameter ID: CARRIERTYPEPRIORIND
The default value of this parameter is NONE
Integrate Priority Configured Reference

Parameter ID: PRIORITYREFERENCE
Value range: ARP, Traffic Class
Content: This parameter is used to set the criterion by which the priority is first sorted.
The default value of this parameter is ARP
Set this parameter through SET USERPRIORITY
Indicator of Carrier Type Priority

Parameter ID: CARRIERTYPEPRIORIND
Value range: NONE, DCH, HSPA
Content: This parameter is used to decide which carrier (DCH or HSPA) takes
precedence when ARP and Traffic Class are identical. When this parameter is set to
NONE, the bearing priority of services on the DCH is the same as that of HSPA
services.
The default value of this parameter is NONE,
Set this parameter through SET USERPRIORITY
Contents
2.1 PUC (Potential User Control)
2.2 LDB (Intra-Frequency Load Balancing)
2.3 CAC (Call Admission Control)
2.4 IAC (Intelligent Admission Control)
2.5 LDR (Load Reshuffling)
2.6 OLC (Overload Control)

PUC Principles
z The Potential User Control (PUC) algorithm controls the
Inter-frequency cell reselection of the potential UE, and
prevents UE from camping on a heavily loaded cell.
z Potential UE :
IDLE Mode UE
CELL-FACH UE，CELL-PCH UE，URA-PCH UE
The function of PUC is to balance traffic load among inter-frequency cells. By modifying
cell selection and reselection parameters and broadcasting them through system
information, PUC leads UEs to cell with light load. The UE may be in idle mode,
Cell_FACH state, Cell _PCH state, URA_PCH state
PUC Load Judgment
Cell load for PUC is of three states: heavy, normal, and light
The RNC periodically monitors the downlink load of the cell and compares the
measurement results with the configured thresholds Load level division threshold 1 and
Load level division threshold 2, that is, load level division upper and lower thresholds.
If the cell load is higher than the load level division upper threshold plus the Load level
division hysteresis, the cell load is considered heavy.
If the cell load is lower than the load level division lower threshold minus the Load level
division hysteresis, the cell load is considered light.
Otherwise the cell load is considered normal
PUC Procedure
Threshold
Every 200ms
Cell TCP
Heavy?
Light?
Normal?
System information
cell reselection
RNC parameters NodeB UE
Every 30 minutes
The parameters related to cell selection and cell reselection are Qoffset1(s,n) (load level
offset), Qoffset2(s,n) (load level offset), and Sintersearch (start threshold for inter-
frequency cell reselection).
The NodeB periodically reports the total TCP of the cell, and the PUC periodically triggers
the following activities:
Assessing the cell load level based on the total TCP
Configuring Sintersearch, Qoffset1(s,n), and Qoffset2(s,n) based on the cell load level
PUC can Modify inter-frequency cell reselection parameters based on the load:
1. Sintersearch :
when the load of a cell is “Heavy”, PUC will increase Sintersearch
when the load of a cell is “Light”, PUC will decrease Sintersearch
2. QOffset:
when the load of current cell is “Heavy” and neighbor is “Non heavy”, PUC will decrease
QOffset
when the load of current cell is “Non heavy” and neighbor is “Heavy”, PUC will increase
QOffset
Updating the parameters of system information SIB3 and SIB11

Load of Current Cell Sintersearch Change of
Sintersearch
Light S'intersearch = Sintersearch + Sintersearch offset 1 ↘
Normal S'intersearch = Sintersearch →
Heavy S'intersearch = Sintersearch + Sintersearch offset 2 ↗
→: indicates that the parameter value remains unchanged.

↗: indicates that the parameter value increases.
↘: indicates that the parameter value decreases.
PUC Principles
Light load 1.Hard to trigger reselection Normal load
Freq1 Modify 2.Easy to camp on the cell
Stay
System Info Increase the POTENTIAL load System Info
SIB3,11 SIB3,11
Freq2 1.Easy to trigger reselection Heavy load

2.Easy to select light load Modify
Inter-freq neighbor Cell
System Info
Decrease the POTENTIAL load SIB3,11
Idle state CCH state
Based on the characteristics of inter-frequency cell selection and reselection.

Sintersearch
When this value is increased by the serving cell, the UE starts inter-frequency cell
reselection ahead of schedule.
When this value is decreased by the serving cell, the UE delays inter-frequency
cell reselection.
Qoffset1(s,n): applies to R (reselection) rule with CPICH RSCP

When this value is increased by the serving cell, the UE has a lower probability of
selecting a neighboring cell.
When this value is decreased by the serving cell, the UE has a higher probability
of selecting a neighboring cell.
Qoffset2(s,n): applies to R (reselection) rule with CPICH Ec/I0

When this value is increased by the serving cell, the UE has a lower probability of
selecting a neighboring cell.
When this value is decreased by the serving cell, the UE has a higher probability
of selecting a neighboring cell.
Key parameters PUC
z Cell LDC algorithm switch
Parameter ID: NBMLDCALGOSWITCH PUC
The default value of this parameter is Off
z Load level division threshold 1 (Heavy)

Parameter ID: SPUCHEAVY
The default value of this parameter is 70(70%)
z Load level division threshold 2 (Light)

Parameter ID: SPUCLIGHT
Cell LDC algorithm switch

Parameter ID: NBMLDCALGOSWITCH PUC
Content: This parameter is used to enable or disable the PUC algorithm..
Set this parameter through ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / MOD CELLALGOSWITCH
Load level division threshold 1 (Heavy)
Parameter ID: SPUCHEAVY
Content: This parameter is one of the thresholds used to assess cell load level and to
decide whether the cell load level is heavy or not.
The default value of this parameter is 70%,
Set this parameter through ADD CELLPUC / MOD CELLPUC
Load level division threshold 2 (Light)

Parameter ID: SPUCLIGHT
Content: This parameter is one of the thresholds used to assess cell load level and to
decide whether the cell load level is heavy or not.
Key parameters PUC
z Load level division hysteresis
Parameter ID: SPUCHYST
z PUC period timer length

Parameter ID: PUCPERIODTIMERLEN
The default value of this parameter is 1800(s)
Load level division hysteresis

Parameter ID: SPUCHYST
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis used during cell load level
assessment to avoid unnecessary ping-pong effect of a cell between two load levels
due to a little load change.
PUC period timer length

Parameter ID: PUCPERIODTIMERLEN
Value range: 6 to 86400 s
Content: This parameter specifies the period of potential user control. The higher the
parameter is set, the longer the period to trigger the PUC is.
The default value of this parameter is 1800(s)
Set this parameter through SET LDCPERIOD
Key parameters PUC
z Sintersearch offset 1
Parameter ID: OFFSINTERLIGHT
The default value of this parameter is –2 (-4dB)
z Sintersearch offset 2
Parameter ID: OFFSINTERHEAVY
Sintersearch offset 1
Parameter ID: OFFSINTERLIGHT
Value range: –10 to 10 ,step:2dB
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Sintersearch when the center cell load
level is "Light". It is strongly recommended that this parameter be set to a value not
higher than 0. The default value of this parameter is –2 (-4dB)
Sintersearch offset 2
Parameter ID: OFFSINTERHEAVY
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Sintersearch when the center cell load
level is "Heavy". It is strongly recommended that this parameter be set to a value not
lower than 0. The default value of this parameter is 2 (4dB)
Key parameters PUC
z Qoffset1 offset 1
Parameter ID: OFFQOFFSET1LIGHT
z Qoffset1 offset 2
Parameter ID: OFFQOFFSET1HEAVY
Qoffset1 offset 1
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Qoffset1（RSCP） when the current
cell has heavy load and the neighboring cell has light or normal load. To enable the
UE to select a neighboring cell with relatively light load, it is strongly recommended
that this parameter be set to a value not higher than 0.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLPUC/MOD CELLPUC
Qoffset1 offset 2
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Qoffset1（RSCP） when the load of a
neighboring cell is heavier than that of the center cell. To enable the UE to select a
neighboring cell with relatively light load, it is strongly recommended that this
parameter be set to a value not lower than 0.
Key parameters PUC
z Qoffset2 offset 1
z Qoffset2 offset 2
Qoffset1 offset 1
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Qoffset1（RSCP） when the current cell
has heavy load and the neighboring cell has light or normal load. To enable the UE to
select a neighboring cell with relatively light load, it is strongly recommended that this
parameter be set to a value not higher than 0.
Qoffset1 offset 2
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Qoffset2（EcNo） when the load of a
neighboring cell is heavier than that of the center cell. To enable the UE to select a
neighboring cell with relatively light load, it is strongly recommended that this
parameter be set to a value not lower than 0.
Contents

Intra-Frequency Load Balancing
z Intra-frequency Load Balancing (LDB) is performed to adjust
the coverage areas of cells by modifying PCPICH power
z LDB affect UEs in all states
Intra-frequency Load Balancing (LDB) is performed to adjust the coverage areas of

cells according to the measured values of cell downlink power load. RNC checks the
load of cells periodically and adjusts the transmit power of the P-CPICH in the
associated cells based on the cell load.
When the load of a cell increases, the cell reduces its coverage to lighten its load.
When the load of a cell decreases, the cell extends its coverage so that some traffic is
off-loaded from its neighboring cells to it.
Reduction of the pilot power will make the UEs at the edge of the cell handed over to
neighboring cells, especially to those with a relatively light load and with relatively high
pilot power. After that, the downlink load of the cell is lightened accordingly.
LDB Procedure
Threshold
Cell TCP
Heavy?
Handover or
Light?
Cell Reselection
Normal? Updated PCPICH
Modify cell PCPICH POWER
power
RNC NodeB UE
The NodeB periodically reports the total TCP of the cell, and the LDB periodically triggers
the following activities:
Assessing the cell load level based on the total TCP
If the downlink load of a cell is higher than the value of the Cell overload threshold, it is
an indication that the cell is heavily loaded. In this case, the transmit power of the P-
CPICH needs to be reduced by a step, which is defined by the Pilot power adjustment
step parameter. However, if the current transmit power is equal to the value of the Min
transmit power of PCPICH parameter, no adjustment is performed.
If the downlink load of a cell is lower than the value of the Cell underload threshold, it is
an indication that the cell has sufficient remaining capacity for more load. In this case, the
transmit power of the P-CPICH increases by a step, which is defined by the Pilot power
adjustment step parameter, to help to lighten the load of neighboring cells. However, if
the current transmit power is equal to the value of the Max transmit power of PCPICH
parameter, no adjustment is performed.
Key parameters LDB
Parameter ID: NBMLdcAlgoSwitch LDB
The default value of this parameter is Off
z Intra-frequency LDB period timer length

Parameter ID: IntraFreqLdbPeriodTimerLen
The default value of this parameter is 1800 (s)

Parameter ID: NBMLdcAlgoSwitch LDB
Content: This parameter is used to enable or disable the LDB algorithm..
Intra-frequency LDB period timer length

Parameter ID: IntraFreqLdbPeriodTimerLen
Content: This parameter specifies the length of the intra-frequency LDB period.
The default value of this parameter is 1800 (s)
Key parameters LDB
z Cell overload threshold (Heavy)
Parameter ID: CellOverrunThd
z Cell underload threshold (Light)

Parameter ID: CellUnderrunThd
Cell overload threshold

Parameter ID: CellOverrunThd
Content: If the downlink load of a cell exceeds this threshold, the algorithm can
decrease the pilot transmit power of the cell so as to extend the capacity of the whole
system.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDB / MOD CELLLDB
Cell underload threshold

Parameter ID: CellUnderrunThd
Content: If the downlink load of a cell is lower than this threshold, the algorithm can
increase the pilot transmit power of the cell so as to share the load of other cells.
Key parameters LDB
z Pilot power adjustment step
Parameter ID: PCPICHPowerPace
The default value of this parameter is 2 (0.2dB)
z Max transmit power of PCPICH

Parameter ID: MaxPCPICHPower
The default value of this parameter is 346 (34.6dBm)
Pilot power adjustment step

Parameter ID: PCPICHPowerPace
Value range: 0 to 10 , Step 0.1dB
Content: This parameter defines the step for the adjustment to the pilot power.
The default value of this parameter is 2, 0.2dB
Max transmit power of PCPICH

Parameter ID: MaxPCPICHPower
Value range: –100 to 500 ,Step 0.1dB
Content: This parameter defines the maximum transmit power of the P-CPICH in a cell.
This parameter has to be set according to the actual system environment, that is, for
example, cell coverage (radius) and geographical environment. If the maximum transmit
power of the P-CPICH is set too low, the cell coverage decreases. When a certain
proportion of soft handover area is ensured, any more increase in the pilot power
achieves no improvement on the performance of the downlink coverage.
Set this parameter through ADD PCPICH / MOD PCPICHPWR
Key parameters LDB
Min transmit power of PCPICH
Parameter ID: MinPCPICHPower
Min transmit power of PCPICH

Parameter ID: MinPCPICHPower
Content: This parameter defines the minimum transmit power of the P-CPICH in a cell.
This parameter has to be set according to the actual system environment, that is, for
example, (radius) and geographical environment. If the minimum transmit power of the
P-CPICH is set too low, the cell coverage will be affected. The parameter has to be set
under the condition that a certain proportion of soft handover area is ensured or the
occurrence of coverage hole can be prevented.
Set this parameter through ADD PCPICH / MOD PCPICHPWR
Contents

Why we need CAC?
z WCDMA is an interference limited system, after a new call is
admitted, the system load will be increased
z If a cell is high loaded, a new call will cause ongoing user

dropped
z We must keep the coverage planned by the Radio Network

Planning
CAC is needed under such scenarios:

1. RRC connection setup request
2. RAB setup and Bandwidth increasing
3. Handover
4. RB reconfiguration
Flow chart of CAC
The admission decision is based on:

• Cell available code resource: managed in RNC
• Cell available power resource, that is DL/UL load : measured in NodeB
• NodeB resource state, that is, NodeB credits : managed in RNC
• Available Iub transport layer resource, that is, Iub transmission bandwidth:
managed in RNC
• HSPA user number (only for HSPA service)
Algorithm Switch of CAC
Admission control Switches can be set on RNC LMT:
z Power CAC
Uplink CAC algorithm switch
Downlink CAC algorithm switch
z NodeB Credit CAC

CAC algorithm switch : CacSwitch
Cell CAC algorithm switch: CRD_ADCTRL
z HSDPA user number CAC

CAC algorithm switch :HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
z HSUPA user number CAC

CAC algorithm switch: HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL
Except the mandatory code and Iub resource admission control, the admission control based
on power and NodeB credit ,HSDPA User Number can be disabled through the LMT command:
Power CAC can be switched off by ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / MOD CELLALGOSWITCH

Uplink CAC algorithm switch (NBMULCACALGOSELSWITCH ) specifies the algorithm used
for power admission in the uplink.
Downlink CAC algorithm switch (NBMDLCACALGOSELSWITCH) specifies the algorithm
used for power admission in the downlink.
NodeB Credit CAC can be switched off by SET CACALGOSWITCH or ADD

CELLALGOSWITCH / MOD CELLALGOSWITCH
CAC algorithm switch (CacSwitch) specifies the NodeB level credit CAC algorithm
Cell CAC algorithm switch (CRD_ADCTRL) specifies the Cell level credit CAC algorithm
HSDPA user number CAC switched off by ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / MOD

CELLALGOSWITCH
HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL specifies whether to enable or disable the HSDPA admission control
algorithm.
HSUPA user number CAC switched off by ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / MOD

CELLALGOSWITCH
HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL specifies whether to enable or disable the HSUPA admission control
algorithm
CAC Based on Code Resource
z Code Resource CAC functions in:
RRC connection setup
Handover
R99 services RAB setup
Note: RRC connection setup and Handover have higher priority
When a new service attempts to access the network, code resource admission is
mandatory.
1. For RRC connection setup requests, the code resource admission is successful if the
current remaining code resource is enough for the RRC connection.
2. For handover services, the code resource admission is successful if the current
remaining code resource is enough for the service.
3. For other R99 services, the RNC has to ensure that the remaining code does not
exceed the configurable threshold after admission of the new service.
4. For HSDPA services, the reserved codes are shared by all HSDPA services. Therefore,
the code resource admission is not needed.
So the RRC connection setup and Handover has higher priority to access a cell
CAC Based on Power Resource
z UL and DL Power Resource CAC functions in:
R99 cell
R99 RAB setup
Handover
HSPA cell
RRC connection
R99 RAB setup
HSPA RAB setup
Handover
Note: RRC connection setup and Handover have higher priority
The UL CAC and DL CAC are independent .

The basic principle of Power CAC is: RNC predict the cell power load after the access. If
the load will be higher than a threshold, the admission is failed.
So, by setting different threshold for different access, we can realize different priorities.
Power CAC Algorithms
z Algorithm 1: based on UL/DL load measurement and load
prediction (RTWP and TCP)
z Algorithm 2: based on Equivalent Number of User (ENU)
z Algorithm 3: loose call admission control algorithm
Huawei provide 3 Power CAC Algorithms

Algorithm 1: power resource admission decision based on power or interference.
Depending on the current cell load (uplink load factor and downlink transmitted carrier power)
and the access request, the RNC determines whether the cell load will exceed the threshold
upon admitting a new call. If yes, the RNC rejects the request. If not, the RNC accepts the
request.
Algorithm 2: power resource admission decision based on the number of equivalent
users.Based on Huawei testing and experience, The 12.2 kbit/s AMR traffic is used to
calculate the Equivalent Number of Users (ENU) of all other services in UL and DL. The
12.2 kbit/s AMR traffic's ENU is assumed to be 1. Depending on the current number of
equivalent users and the access request in UL and DL, the RNC determines whether the
number of equivalent users will exceed the threshold upon admitting a new call. If yes, the
RNC rejects the request. If not, the RNC accepts the request.
Algorithm 3: power resource admission decision based on power or interference, but with
the estimated load increment always set to 0.Depending on the current cell load (uplink load
factor and downlink TCP) and the access request, the RNC determines whether the cell
load will exceed the threshold, with the estimated load increment set to 0. If yes, the RNC
rejects the request. If not, the RNC accepts the request.
Basic principle of Uplink CAC Algorithm 1
Admission request
PN
Get current RTWP, and calculate the
current load factor
ηUL = 1 −
RTWP
Get the traffic characteristic, and
estimate the increment of load factor Δη
Calculate the predicted load factor ηUL _ predicted = ηUL + Δη + ηCCH
Smaller than
Y N
the threshold?
admitted rejected
End of UL CAC
Pn is uplink receive background noise.

The procedure for uplink power resource decision is as follows:
1. The RNC obtains the uplink RTWP of the cell, and calculate the current uplink load
factor.
2. The RNC calculates the uplink load increment ΔηUL based on the service request.
3. The RNC uses the formula ηUL,predicted=ηUL + ΔηUL to forecast the uplink load
factor.
4. By comparing the forecasted uplink load factor ηUL,predicted with the corresponding
threshold ,the RNC decides whether to accept the access request or not.
Basic principle of Downlink CAC Algorithm1
The procedure for downlink power resource decision is as follows:

1. The RNC obtains the cell downlink TCP, and calculates the downlink load factor by
multiplying the maximum downlink transmit power by this TCP.
2. The RNC calculates the downlink load increment ΔP based on the service request and
the current load.
3. The RNC forecasts the downlink load factor.
4. By comparing the downlink load factor with the corresponding threshold (DL threshold
of Conv AMR service, DL threshold of Conv non_AMR service, DL threshold of other
services, DL Handover access threshold), the RNC decides whether to accept the
access request or not.
Basic principle of CAC Algorithm 2
Admission request
N
Get current total ENU ENU total (N ) = ∑ ENU
i =1
i
Get the traffic characteristic, and

ENU new
estimate the increment of ENU
Calculate the predicted ENU ENU total ( N + 1) = ENU total ( N ) + ENU new
Y
Smaller than
N
ENULoad = ENU total ( N + 1) / ENU max
the threshold?
admitted rejected
End of UL/DL CAC
The procedure for ENU resource decision is as follows:

1. The RNC obtains the total ENU of all exist users ENUtotal.
2. The RNC get the ENU of the new incoming user ENUnew.
3. The RNC forecast the ENU load.
4. By comparing the forecasted ENU load with the corresponding threshold (the same
threshold as power resource), the RNC decides whether to accept the access request
or not.
The ENUmax can be set by LMT, the ENUnew and ENUi is determined by Huawei
algorithm, there is an example in next slide.
Power CAC for RRC connection Setup
z For the RRC connection request is, tolerance principles are
applied :
Emergency call, Detach , Registration
Direct Admission
RRC connection request for other reasons

UL/ DL OLC Trigger threshold Admission
To ensure that the RRC connection request is not denied by mistake, tolerance principles
are applied.
The admission decision is made for the following reasons of the RRC connection request:
1. For the RRC connection request for the reasons of emergency call, detach or
registration, direct admission is used ,that is no limitation.
2. For the RRC connection request for other reasons, UL/DL OLC Trigger
threshold is used for admission. By default, the OLC trigger threshold is
relatively high (DL/UL 95%), which make the RRC connections are easily set
up.
UL Power CAC for R99 Cell (Algorithm1)
z For R99 DCH RAB Setup, The RNC uses the following formula
to predict the uplink load factor :
ηUL _ predicted = ηUL + ΔηUL + ηUL − CCH
Where the
PN
ηUL = 1 −
RTWP
z By comparing the predicted uplink load factor ηUL,predicted with the
corresponding threshold ,the RNC decides whether to accept the
access request or not
The threshold for Conv AMR service , Conv non_AMR service , Other R99 services ,
Handover are set independently, which provide different priorities.
Normally, Other R99 services < Conv non_AMR service services < Conv AMR
service < Handover
The uplink load increment ΔηUL is determined by :
1. The Eb/No of the new incoming call
2. The uplink load increment is proportional to the value of Eb/No.
3. UL neighbor interference factor
4. Active Factor of the new incoming call
DL Power CAC for R99 Cell (Algorithm1)
z For R99 DCH RAB Setup, The RNC uses the following formula to
predict the downlink load factor :
η DL _ predicted = η DL + Δη DL + η DL − CCH
Where the
TCP Δη DL
η DL = Δη DL =
Pmax Pmax
z By comparing the predicted downlink load factor ηDL,predicted with
the corresponding threshold ,the RNC decides whether to accept
the access request or not
The threshold for Conv AMR service , Conv non_AMR service , Other R99 services ,
Handover are set independently, which provide different priorities.
Normally, Other R99 services < Conv non_AMR service services < Conv AMR service <
Handover
The downlink load increment ΔηDL is determined by :
1. The Eb/No of the new incoming call
2. Non-orthogonality factor
3. Current transmission carrier power
4. Active Factor of the new incoming call
UL Power CAC for HSPA Cell (Algorithm1)
z The power increment of an HSUPA service is related to Ec/No,
GBR requirement, neighboring interference factor, active factor of
the service. The formula of UL power CAC for HSUPA is similar to
that for R99
z After RSEPS measurement is introduced, the UL RTWP is divided
into two parts:
Controllable part
The UL interference generated by E-DCH scheduling services belong to
the controllable part
Uncontrollable part
RSEPS: Received scheduled E-DCH power share

z E-DCH scheduling service consists of following two types:
TypeA: all UEs for which this cell is the serving E-DCH cell
The uplink load generated by TypeA E-DCH scheduling service is defined as follows:
RSEPS
ηUL − EDCH , S =
RTWP
TypeB: all UEs for which this cell is
NOT the serving EDCH-cell
The uplink load generated by
TypeB E-DCH scheduling service
is defined by ηUL,EDCH,f,
which is fixed to zero
The Uplink uncontrollable load

Is defined as follows:
ηUL , non − ctrl = ηUL − ηUL , EDCH , s − ηUL , EDCH , f

z UL Power CAC for HSUPA Scheduling Services and HSUPA Non-Scheduling Services
z RNC admits HSUPA scheduling service in either of the following cases

Formula 1,2 or 3 is fulfilled
Formula 4 is fulfilled
z RNC admits HSUPA Non-scheduling service in either of the following cases
Formula 1,2 or 3 is fulfilled
Formula 4 and 5 are fulfilled
ThdL is the Low priority HSUPA user PBR threshold of the current cell
ThdE is the Equal priority HSUPA user PBR threshold of the current cell
ThdGE is the High priority HSUPA user PBR threshold of the current cell
ηHS-DPCCH is the value of the UL HS-DPCCH reserve factor parameter, which defines the factor of
UL HS-DPCCH resource reserved
ηthd is the cell UL admission threshold for specific type of service, that is UL threshold of Conv
AMR service, UL threshold of Conv non_AMR service, UL threshold of other services or UL
handover access service threshold
z UL Power CAC for R99 service in HSPA cell
Uncontollable interference must be kept within a given
range. The purpose is to ensure the stability of system and
to prevent non-scheduling services and DCH services
from seizing the resources of HSUPA services
ηUL , non − ctrl + ΔηUL + ηUL , cch + η HS − DPCCH < ηthd

ηUL + ΔηUL + ηUL., cch + η HS − DPCCH < ηthd − total
RNC admits R99 services if formula 1 and 2 are fulfilled
ηthd-total is the UL total power threshold of the current cell

ηthd is the cell UL admission threshold for specific type of service, that is UL threshold of Conv
AMR service, UL threshold of Conv non_AMR service, UL threshold of other services or UL
handover access service threshold
DL Power CAC for HSPA Cell (Algorithm1)
z DL Power incremental estimation for DCH RAB in HSPA
cell is similar to the DCH RAB in R99 cell
z DL Power incremental estimation for HSDPA RAB ΔPDL is

made based on GBR, Ec/No, Non-orthogonality factor

z DL power CAC for R99 service in HSPA cell
z RNC admits R99 service (i.e. DCH RAB) in either of the

following situations:
Pnon-hspa is the current non-HSDPA power

Pcch-res is the power reserved for the common channel
Pmax is the cell maximum transmit power
Thdnon-hspa-cac is the cell DL admission threshold for different types of service, that is DL
threshold for Conv AMR service, DL threshold for Conv non-AMR service, DL threshold for
other service or DL handover access threshold
Ptotal is the current downlink transmitted carrier power
Thdtotal-cac is the threshold of cell DL total power. It is defined by the DL total power threshold
parameter
GBP is power requirement for GBR
Phsupa-res is the power reserved for HSUPA downlink control channels (E-AGCH/E-RGCH/E-HICH)
Pmax-hspa is the maximum available power for HSPA. Its value is associated with the HSDPA
power allocation mode.
z DL power CAC for HSDPA RAB in HSPA cell
z RNC admits the HSDPA streaming service in any of the following situations:
Formulas 3 and 4 are fulfilled
z RNC admits the HSDPA BE service in any of the following situations:
PBRstrm is the provided bit rate of all existing streaming services

Thdhsdap-str is the admission threshold for streaming PBR decision. It is defined by the Hsdpa
streaming PBR threshold parameter
PBRbe is the provided bit rate of all existing BE services
Thdhsdap-be is the admission threshold for BE PBR decision. It is defined by the Hsdpa best effort
PBR threshold parameter
GBR is the power requirement for GBR
Phsupa-res is the power reserved for HSUPA downlink control channels (E-AGCH/E-RGCH/E-HICH)
Pmax-hspa is the maximum available power for HSPA. Its value is associated with the HSDPA
power allocation mode.
Ptotal is the current downlink transmitted carrier power
Pmax is the cell maximum transmitted power
Thdtotal-cac is the threshold of cell DL total power, which is defined by the DL total power
threshold parameter
Pcch-res is the power reserved for the common channels
Pnon-hspa is the current non-HSDPA power
z DL power CAC for HSUPA control channels in HSPA cell
The power of downlink control channels (E-AGCH/E-RGCH/E-
HICH) are reserved by DL HSUPA reserved factor. Therefore,
the power admission for these channels is NOT needed

Power CAC for Algorithm2
z For R99 and HSDPA RAB, The RNC uses the following formula
to predict the uplink load factor :
(ENUtotal + ENUnew) / ENUmax
z By comparing the forecasted ENU load with the corresponding

threshold ,the RNC decides whether to accept the access request
or not
ENUtotal is the total ENU of all existing users.

ENUnew is ENU of the new incoming user .
ENUmax is the configured maximum ENU (UL total equivalent user number or DL total
nonhsdpa equivalent user number) .
The threshold for Algorithm2 are the same with Algorithm1,for Conv AMR service ,
Conv non_AMR service , Other R99 services , Handover , HSDPA are set independently:
Service Type Admission Threshold

UL DCH/HSUPA UL threshold of Conv AMR service
UL threshold of Conv non_AMR service
UL threshold of other services
UL Handover access threshold
DL DCH DL threshold of Conv AMR service

DL threshold of Conv non_AMR service
DL threshold of other services
DL Handover access threshold
HSDPA DL total power threshold

Typically ENU (equivalent number of users) for different services (with activity factor to be
100%)
Service Type Admission Threshold

UL DCH/HSUPA UL threshold of Conv AMR service
DL DCH DL threshold of Conv AMR service

HSDPA DL total power threshold

Key parameters
z UL threshold of Conv AMR service
Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForAMR
The default value of this parameter is 75%
z UL threshold of Conv non_AMR service

Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR
UL threshold of Conv AMR service

Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForAMR
Value range: 0 to 100 %
Content: The uplink threshold for the AMR conversational service is used for the uplink
admission of AMR conversational service users. The threshold is shared by algorithm 1,
algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC / MOD CELLCAC

Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR
Content: The downlink threshold for the AMR conversational service is used for the
downlink admission of AMR conversational service users. The threshold is shared by
algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Key parameters
z UL threshold of other services
Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForOther
z UL Handover access threshold

Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForHo

Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForOther
Content: This parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the
conversational service. It is used for uplink admission of other services. The threshold is
shared by algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.

Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForHo
Content: The uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users.
The parameter is useful only to uplink inter-frequency handovers. Do not make the
admission decision in the uplink soft handover. The threshold is shared by algorithm 1,
algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Key parameters
z DL threshold of Conv AMR service
Parameter ID: DLCONVAMRTHD
z DL threshold of Conv non_AMR service

Parameter ID: DLCONVNAMRTHD
DL threshold of Conv AMR service

Parameter ID: DLCONVAMRTHD
Content: The downlink threshold for the AMR conversational service is used for the
downlink admission of AMR conversational service users. The threshold is shared by
algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.

Parameter ID: DLCONVNAMRTHD
Content: The downlink threshold for the non-AMR conversational service is used for the
downlink admission of non-AMR conversational service users. The threshold is shared
by algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Key parameters
z DL threshold of other services
Parameter ID: DLOTHERTHD
z DL Handover access threshold

Parameter ID: DLHOTHD

Parameter ID: DLOTHERTHD
Content: This parameter is the downlink threshold for services other than the
conversational service. It is used for downlink admission of users of other services. The
threshold is shared by algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC/MOD CELLCAC

Parameter ID: DLHOTHD
Content: The downlink handover threshold is used for downlink admission of handover
users. The threshold is shared by algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Key parameters
z DL total power threshold
Parameter ID: DLCELLTOTALTHD
z Hsdpa streaming PBR threshold

Parameter ID: HSDPASTRMPBRTHD
z Hsdpa best effort PBR threshold

Parameter ID: HSDPABEPBRTHD
DL total power threshold

Parameter ID: DLCELLTOTALTHD
Content: This parameter specifies the total downlink power threshold of the cell.
Hsdpa streaming PBR threshold

Parameter ID: HSDPASTRMPBRTHD
Content: This parameter specifies the average throughput admission threshold of the
HSDPA streaming traffic.
Hsdpa streaming PBR threshold

Parameter ID: : HSDPABEPBRTHD
Content: This parameter specifies the average throughput admission threshold of the
HSDPA best effort traffic.
Key parameters
z UL total equivalent user number
Parameter ID: ULTOTALEQUSERNUM
z DL total equivalent user number

Parameter ID: DLTOTALEQUSERNUM
UL total equivalent user number

Parameter ID: ULTOTALEQUSERNUM
Content: When algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent number
of users corresponding to the 100% uplink load.
DL total equivalent user number

Parameter ID: DLTOTALEQUSERNUM
Content: When algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent number
of users corresponding to the 100% downlink load.
CAC Based on NodeB Credit Resource
z When a new service accesses the network, NodeB credit
resource admission is optional
z The principles of NodeB credit admission control are similar

to those of power resource admission control, that is, to
check in the local cell whether the remaining credit can
support the requesting services
CE stands for NodeB credit on RNC side and for Channel Element on NodeB side. It is
used to measure the channel demodulation capability of the NodeBs
The resource of one 12.2kbps voice service, including 3.4kbps signaling on the DCCH,
consumed in baseband is defined as one CE. If there is 3.4kbps signaling on the DCCH,
but no voice channel, one CE is consumed.The credit resource are divided into several
resource pools. Each resource pool is shared by a local cell.
According to the common and dedicated channels capacity consumption laws, as well as
the addition, removal, and reconfiguration of the common and dedicated channels, the
Controlling RNC (CRNC) debits the amount of the credit resource consumed from or
credits the amount to the Capacity Credit of the local cell group (and local cell , if any)
based on the spreading factor.
the UL Capacity Credit and DL Capacity Credit are separate, so the CAC is performed in
the UL and DL, respectively.
z For DCH service, MBR is used to calculate the NodeB
Credit based on spreading factor :
z The total NodeB Credit Resource of a local cell is depend on

the configuration.
Direction Spreading Corresponding Credits Consumed Typical Traffic Class

Factor
DL 256 1
UL 256 2 3.4 kbit/s SRB
DL 128 1
UL 64 2 13.6 kbit/s SRB
DL 128 1
UL 64 2 12.2 kbit/s AMR
DL 32 2
UL 16 6 64 kbit/s VP
DL 64 1
UL 32 3 32 kbps PS
DL 32 2
UL 16 6 64 kbit/s PS
DL 16 4
DL 8 8
z For HSUPA service, the rate used to calculate the
spreading factor is MBR

z When a new service tries to access the network, the credit
resource admission CAC functions in :
Handover service
The other services
For an RRC connection setup request, the credit resource admission is successful if the current
remaining credit resource is sufficient for the RRC connection.
For a handover service, the credit resource admission is successful if the current remaining credit
resource is sufficient for the service.
For other services, the RNC has to ensure that the remaining credit does not exceed the
configurable thresholds after admission of the new services.
There is no capacity consumption law for HS-DSCH in 3GPP TS 25.433, so certain credits are
reserved for HSDPA RAB, and credit admission for HSDPA is not needed.
UL Capacity Credit and DL Capacity Credit are separate, the credit resource admission is
implemented in the UL and DL, respectively.
Key parameters
z Ul HandOver Credit Reserved SF
Parameter ID: UlHoCeResvSf
The default value of this parameter is SF16
z Dl HandOver Credit and Code Reserved SF

Parameter ID: DlHoCeCodeResvSf
Ul HandOver Credit Reserved SF

Parameter ID: UlHoCeResvSf
Value range: SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF
Content: The spreading factor specified by this parameter is used to define the uplink
credit resource reserved for handover services.
SFOFF means that none of resources are reserved for handover services. If the
remaining uplink resource cannot fulfill the requirement for the reserved resource after
the admission of a new service, the service is rejected.
Dl HandOver Credit and Code Reserved SF

Parameter ID: DlHoCeCodeResvSf
Value range: SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF
Content: The spreading factor specified by this parameter is used to define the downlink
credit and channelized code resources reserved for handover services.
SFOFF means that none of the resources is reserved for handover. If the remaining
downlink resource cannot fulfill the requirement for the reserved resource after the
access of a new service, the service is rejected.
CAC Based on Iub Interface Resource
z The CAC of the Iub transmission resources is similar
z Admission Control is used to determine whether the Iub

resources are enough to accept a new access request
z It functions in:
RRC connection setup and Services RAB setup
Handover
A user accessing the network from a path should go through the admission of the path,
resource group, and physical port in turn. The user that passes all the admission can be
successfully admitted by the transport layer.
Path means AAL2 PATH, IP PATH
The physical ports correspond to IMA, UNI, FRAATM, NCOPT, ETHER, PPP, and MLPPP.
The priority of the 2 types of access follows : Handover >RRC connection setup and
Services RAB setup
z Iub Overbooking
The Iub overbooking feature considers the statistic multiplexing
of service activities and multiple users
Admit more users, increases the resource utilization on the Iub

interface.
The Iub overbooking feature considers the statistic multiplexing of service activities and
multiple users. Through the admission of more users, Iub overbooking increases the
resource utilization on the Iub interface.
If the RNC allocates the maximum bandwidth to the subscriber when a service is
established, a large proportion of the Iub transmission bandwidth is unused. For example,
downloading a 50 KB page takes only about one second, but reading this page needs
dozens of seconds. Thus, over 90% of the Iub transmission bandwidth is not used.
To save the Iub transmission bandwidth for operator use, Huawei provides the Iub
overbooking function, which applies an admission control mechanism to access the
service.
z Iub Overbooking
CS voice services
Service rate:12.2 kbit/s
SID
PS interactive and background services

Download time
Reading time
The UMTS supports four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive, and
background.
The transmission rate varies with the traffic class as follows:
For Circuit Switched (CS) conversational services, the channel transmits voice signals at
a certain rate (for example, 12.2 kbit/s) during a conversation and only transmits Silence
Descriptors (SIDs) at intervals when there is no conversation.
For Packet Switched (PS) interactive and background services, such as web browsing,
there is data transmitted during data downloading. After a web page has been
downloaded, and when the user is reading the page, however, there is very little data to
transfer.
z Iub Overbooking
CS voice services
Activity Factor
PS interactive and background services

GBR
MML
SET DEFAULTFACTORTABLE
SET USERGBR
SET CORRMALGOSWITCH (IUB_OVERBOOKING_SWITCH)
ADD AAL2PATH
ADD IPPATH
Use SET DEFAULTFACTORTABLE to set a default of Activity Factor table for all the
services.
Use SET USERGBR to set GBR for BE services
Use SET CORRMALGOSWITCH (IUB_OVERBOOKING_SWITCH) to define the switch
of Iub overbooking
CAC Based on Number of HSPA Users
z HSPA user number can be limited in:
z Cell level
maximum number of HSPA users in a cell
z NodeB level
Maximum number of HSPA users in all the cells configured in
one NodeB
When the HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL is on, the HSDPA services have to undergo HSDPA
user number admission decision.
When a new HSDPA service attempts to access the network, it is admitted if the number
of HSDPA users in the cell and that in the NodeB do not exceed the associated
thresholds
When the HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL is on, the HSUPA services have to undergo HSUPA
user number admission decision.
When a new HSUPA service attempts to access the network, it is admitted if the number
of HSUPA users in the cell and that in the NodeB do not exceed the associated
thresholds
Key parameters
z HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
Parameter ID: HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
z Maximum HSDPA user number
Parameter ID: MaxHSDSCHUserNum
z HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
Parameter ID: HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL
z Maximum HSUPA user number
Parameter ID: MaxHsupaUserNum
Maximum HSDPA user number

Parameter ID: MaxHSDSCHUserNum
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of HSDPA users in a cell.
HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
Value range: 0 ,1
Content: This parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the HSDPA admission control algorithm.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / LST CELLALGOSWITCH/MOD
CELLALGOSWITCH
HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL
Value range: 0 ,1
Content: This parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the HSDPA admission control algorithm.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / LST CELLALGOSWITCH/MOD
CELLALGOSWITCH
Maximum HSUPA user number

Parameter ID: MaxHsupaUserNum
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of HSDPA users in a cell.
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of HSUPA users in a cell.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC / LST CELLCAC / MOD CELLCAC
Contents

Why we need IAC?
z The disadvantage of CAC
For PS NRT (Non-Real Time) services, CAC is not flexible
No consideration about the priority of different users
No consideration about Directed Retry after CAC rejection
z “Intelligent” means the algorithm can increase admission

successful rate
CAC limits the setup of RRC and RAB . When the cell is overloaded , the CAC will cause
access failure.
In order to improve the access success rate the Intelligent Access Control (IAC) algorithm is
used to improve the access success rate. The IAC procedure includes rate negotiation,
Call Admission Control (CAC), preemption, queuing, and Directed Retry Decision (DRD).
IAC Overview
z The access procedure (include the IAC)
As shown in the Figure, the procedure for the UE access includes the procedures for RRC
connection setup and RAB setup. The success in the RRC connection setup is one of the
prerequisites for the RAB setup.
During the RRC connection processing, if resource admission fails, DRD and redirection apply.
During the RAB processing, the RNC performs the following steps:
• Performs RAB DRD to select a suitable cell to access, for service steering or load balancing.
• Performs rate negotiation according to the service requested by the UE.
• Performs cell resource admission decision. If the admission is passed, UE access is granted.
Otherwise, the RNC performs the next step.
• Selects a suitable cell, according to the RAB DRD algorithm, from the cells where no admission
attempt has been made, and then goes to rate negotiation and cell resource admission again. If
all DRD admission attempts to the cells fail, go to the next step.
• Makes a preemption attempt. If the preemption is successful, UE access is granted. If the
preemption fails or is not supported, the RNC performs the next step, queuing.
• Makes a queuing attempt. If the queuing is successful, UE access is granted. If the queuing fails
or is not supported, the RNC Rejects UE access.
IAC - RRC Connection Processing
When a new service accesses the network, an RRC connection must be set up first. If the
RRC connection request is denied, DRD is performed. If DRD also fails, RRC
redirection is performed to direct the UE to an inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell
through cell reselection.
After the RNC receives the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message, the CAC algorithm
decides whether an RRC connection can be set up between the UE and the current
cell.
If the RRC connection can be set up between the UE and the current cell, the RNC sends
an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE. If the RRC connection cannot
be set up between the UE and the current cell, the RNC takes the following
actions:
RRC DRD :
If the DRD_SWITCH is set to 0, the RRC DRD fails, and RRC redirection is performed.
Else, the RNC performs the following steps:
1. The RNC selects inter-frequency neighboring cells of the current cell. These
neighboring cells are suitable for blind handovers.
2. The RNC generates a list of candidate DRD-supportive inter-frequency cells. The
quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements of inter-frequency DRD:
(CPICH_Ec/No)RACH > DRD_Ec/No nbcell
where
(CPICH_Ec/No)RACH is the cached CPICH Ec/N0 value included in the RACH
measurement report.
DRD_Ec/No nbcell is the DRD Ec/N0 Threshold set for the inter-frequency
neighboring cell.
3. RNC selects a target cell from the candidate cells for UE access. If the candidate cell list contains
more than one cell, the UE tries a cell randomly.
1. If the admission is successful, the RNC initiates an RRC DRD procedure.
2. If the admission to a cell fails, the UE tries admission to another cell in the candidate cell
list. If all the admission attempts fail, the RNC makes an RRC redirection decision.
4. If the candidate cell list does not contain any cell, the RRC DRD fails. The RNC performs the next
step, that is, RRC redirection.
5. RRC redirection, the RNC performs the following steps:

1. The RNC selects all inter-frequency cells of the local cell.
2. The RNC selects candidate cells. That is, exclude the cells to which inter-frequency RRC
DRD attempts have been made from the cells selected in the previous step.
3. If more than one candidate cell is available, the RNC selects a cell randomly and redirects
the UE to the cell.
Key parameters
z RRC redirect switch
Parameter ID: RrcRedictSwitch
The default value of this parameter is

Only_To_Inter_Frequency
z DRD Ec/N0 threshold

Parameter ID: DRDEcN0Threshhold
The default value of this parameter is -18（-9 dB）
RRC redirect switch

Parameter ID: RrcRedictSwitch
Value range: OFF, Only_To_Inter_Frequency, Allowed_To_Inter_RAT
Content: This parameter specifies the RRC redirection strategy.
The default value of this parameter is Only_To_Inter_Frequency
Set this parameter through SET DRD
DRD Ec/N0 threshold

Parameter ID: DRDEcN0Threshhold
Value range: –24 to 0
Content: If the measured Ec/N0 value of the neighbor cell is less than this
parameter, this neighboring cell cannot be selected to be the candidate DRD
cell.
The default value of this parameter is -18（-9 dB）
Set this parameter through ADD INTERFREQNCELL
IAC – PS Rate Negotiation
z PS Service Rate Negotiation Includes:
Maximum expected rate negotiation
Initial rate negotiation
Target rate negotiation
Rate negotiation includes the maximum expected rate negotiation, initial rate negotiation, and target rate negotiation.
When setting up, modifying, or admitting a PS service (conversational, streaming, interactive, or background service)
the RNC and the CN negotiate the rate according to the UE capability to obtain the maximum expected rate while
ensuring a proper QoS.
For a non-real-time service in the PS domain, the RNC selects an initial rate to allocate bandwidth for the service
when Setup or UE state transits from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH based on cell code and credit resource
The Initial rate selection is affected by 2 algorithm switches: RAB Downsizing Switch, DCCC Switch
For DCH For HSUPA
For a non-real-time service in the PS domain, if cell resource admission fails, the RNC chooses a target rate to
allocate bandwidth for the service based on cell resource in Service setup or Soft handover
Key parameters
z RAB_Downsizing_Switch
Parameter ID: RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH
The default value of this parameter is 1 (on)
z UL/DL BE traffic Initial bit rate

Parameter ID:
ULBETRAFFINITBITRATE / DLBETRAFFINITBITRATE
The default value of this parameter is D64 （64k）
RAB_Downsizing_Switch
Parameter ID: RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH
Value range: (0,1)
Content: This parameter specifies whether to support the RAB downsizing function.
The default value of this parameter is 1 (on)
When this parameter is set to 1, the RAB downsizing function is applied to
determine the initial bit rate based on cell resources (code and credit). .
UL/DL BE traffic Initial bit rate

Parameter ID: ULBETRAFFINITBITRATE / DLBETRAFFINITBITRATE
Value range: D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536,
D1800, D2048 k
Content: This parameter defines the uplink initial access rate of background and
interactive services in the PS domain.
The default value of this parameter is D64 （64k）
Set this parameter through SET FRC
IAC – RAB Directed Retry Decision
z RAB Directed Retry Decision (DRD) is used to select a
suitable cell for the UE to try an access
Inter-frequency DRD
Service Steering
Load Balancing
Inter-RAT DRD
Through the RAB DRD procedure, the RNC selects a suitable cell for RAB processing
during access control. RAB DRD is of two types: inter-frequency DRD and inter-RAT
DRD. For inter-frequency DRD, the service steering and load balancing algorithms are
available.
After receiving a RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST, the RNC initiates an RAB
DRD procedure to select a suitable cell for RAB processing during access control.
The RNC performs inter-frequency DRD firstly. If all admission attempts of inter-
frequency DRD fail, the RNC performs an inter-RAT DRD. If all admission attempts of
inter-RAT DRD fail, the RNC selects a suitable cell to perform preemption and
queuing .
Relation Between Service Steering DRD and Load Balancing DRD
When both service steering DRD and load balancing DRD are enabled, the general
principles of inter-frequency DRD are as follows:
• Service steering DRD takes precedence over load balancing DRD. That is,
preferably take service priorities into consideration.
• To services of the same service priority, load balancing applies.
IAC – RAB Directed Retry Decision
RAB Directed Retry Switchs
Scenario Switch Description
DRD switch DRD_SWITCH This is the primary DRD algorithm switch. The
secondary DRD switches are valid only when
this switch is on.
Combined COMB_SERV_DRD_SWITCH DRD is applicable to combined services only

services when this switch is on.
HSDPA service HSDPA_DRD_SWITCH DRD is applicable to HSDPA services only

when this switch is on.
HSUPA service HSUPA_DRD_SWITCH DRD is applicable to HSUPA services only

RAB modification RAB_MODIFY_DRD_SWITCH DRD is applicable to RAB modification only

DCCC RAB_DCCC_DRD_SWITCH DRD is applicable to traffic-volume-based

DCCC procedure or UE state transition, only
RAB setup RAB_SETUP_DRD_SWITCH DRD is applicable to RAB setup only when this
switch is on.
DRD algorithm switch

Parameter ID: DRDSWITCH
The default value of this parameter is off
IAC – Inter-frequency DRD
z Inter-Frequency DRD for Service Steering
DRD for Service Steering is based on Service priorities of
cells ,include:
– R99 RT services priority
– R99 NRT services priority
– HSPA services priority
– Other services priority
Called Service priority group
If the UE requests a service in an area covered by multiple frequencies, the RNC selects
the cell with the highest service priority for UE access, based on the service type of
RAB and the definitions of service priorities in the cells.
Cell service priorities help achieve traffic absorption in a hierarchical way.
The priorities of specific service types in cells are configurable. If a cell does not support a
service type, the priority of this service type is set to 0 in this cell.
The service priorities in each cell is called Service priority group , which is identified by
the Service priority group Identity parameter.
Service priority groups are configured on the LMT. In each group, priorities of R99 RT
services, R99 NRT services, HSPA services, and other services are defined.
When selecting a target cell for RAB processing, the RNC check the service type firstly ,
then, selects a cell with a high priority for the service, that is, a cell that has a small
value of service priority.
z Inter-Frequency DRD for Service Steering
Service Service priority Service priority Service priority Service
An example
priority group of R99 RT of service priority group
of R99 NRT of HSPA priority of
Identity service service service other service
1 2 1 1 0
2 1 2 0 0
Cell A and cell B are of different frequencies.

Assume that the service priority groups given in the table are defined on an RNC, 2
groups of service priorities are defined.
Then ,Cell A is configured with service priority group 1. Cell B is configured with service
priority group 2
If UE requests a R99 RT service in cell A ,Cell B has a higher service priority of the R99
RT service than cell A. If the UE requests an RT service in cell A, preferably, the RNC
selects cell B for the UE to access.
z Inter-Frequency DRD procedure for Service Steering
The procedure for the service steering DRD is as follows:

1、The RNC determines candidate cells to which blind handovers can be performed and sorts the
candidate cells into a descending order according to service priority.
A candidate cell must meet the following conditions:
• The frequency of the candidate cell is within the band supported by the UE.
• The quality of the candidate cell meets the Ec/No requirements of inter-frequency DRD (DRD
Ec/N0 Threshold )
• The candidate cell supports the requested service.
2、The RNC selects a target cell from the candidate cells in order of service priority for UE access.
3、The CAC algorithm makes an admission decision based on the status of the target cell.
• If the admission attempt is successful, the RNC accepts the service request.
• If the admission attempt fails, the RNC removes the cell from the candidate cells and then
choose next candidate cell.
4、If admission decisions have been made in all the candidate cells
• For HSPA access, the HSPA request falls back to a DCH one. Then, the algorithm goes back
to Step 1 to make an admission decision based on R99 service priorities.
• For DCH access, the RNC initiates an inter-RAT DRD.
Key parameters
z Service differential drd switch
Parameter ID: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch
z Service priority group Identity

Parameter ID: PriorityServiceForR99RT
Service differential drd switch

Parameter ID: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch
Value range: ON, OFF
Content: This parameter specifies whether to enable the service steering DRD algorithm
The default value of this parameter is OFF.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLDRD
Service priority of R99 RT service

Parameter ID: SpgId
Value range: 1 to 8
Content: This parameter uniquely identifies a group of service priorities that map to cells
and indicate the support of each cell for the following service types: R99 RT service,
R99 NRT service, HSPA service, and other services.
Set this parameter through ADD SPG
Key parameters
z Service priority of R99 RT service
Parameter ID: SpgId
z Service priority of R99 NRT service

PriorityServiceForR99NRT
z Service priority of HSPA service

PriorityServiceForHSPA
z Service priority of Other service

PriorityServiceForExtRab
Service priority of R99 RT service

Parameter ID: PriorityServiceForR99RT
Value range: 0 to 7
Content: This parameter specifies the support of the cells with a specific Service priority
group Identity for R99 RT services.
The value 0 means that these cells do not support R99 RT services.
For the values 1 through 7, the service priority is inversely proportional to the value, that is,
the value 7 indicates the lowest service priority, whereas the value 1 indicates the highest.
Service priority of R99 NRT service
Parameter ID: PriorityServiceForR99NRT
Value range: 0 to 7
group Identity for R99 NRT services.
The value 0 means that these cells do not support R99 NRT services.
Service priority of HSPA service

Parameter ID: PriorityServiceForHSPA
Value range: 0 to 7
group Identity for HSPA services.
The value 0 means that these cells do not support HSPA services.
Service priority of Other service

Parameter ID: PriorityServiceForExtRab
Value range: 0 to 7
group Identity for Other services .
The value 0 means that these cells do not support Other service .
z Inter-Frequency DRD for Load Balance
The resources triggering DRD for Load Balance include:
DL Power
OVSF code
Any of these 2 resources can trigger inter-frequency DRD for

Load Balance
Load balancing considers two resources: power, and code.

If both are activated, power-based load balancing DRD takes precedence over code-
based load balancing DRD.
Code-based load balancing DRD is applicable to only R99 services because HSDPA
services use reserved codes.
z Inter-Frequency DRD procedure for DL Power Load Balance
The procedure for the service steering DRD is as follows:

1、The RNC determines candidate cells to which blind handovers can be performed and sorts
the candidate cells into a descending order according to service priority.
A candidate cell must meet the following conditions:
• The frequency of the candidate cell is within the band supported by the UE.
• The quality of the candidate cell meets the Ec/No requirements of inter-frequency
DRD (DRD Ec/N0 Threshold )
• The candidate cell supports the requested service.
2、The RNC determines whether the DL radio load of the current cell is lower than the power
threshold for load balancing DRD (condition 1 )
power threshold for load balancing DRD is CAC parameter.
•If the DL load of the current cell is lower than the threshold, the service tries admission to
the current cell.
•If the DL load of the current cell is equal to or higher than the threshold, the RNC checks
the candidate cells to try to find out a target cell for UE access.
RNC will check if there is a candidate cell will meet the following condition (condition 2 ) :
•Ptotal_thd,nbcell is DL total power threshold for the inter-frequency neighboring cell.

•Pload,nbcell is total power load of the inter-frequency neighboring cell. For a R99 cell, it is
the Downlink Transmitted Carrier Power of the cell, and for an HSPA cell, it is the non-
HSDPA power and GBP.
•Ptotal_thd,cutcell is DL total power threshold for the current cell.
•Pload,cutcell is the total downlink load of the current cell.
•Ploadoffset is the Power balancing drd offset of the current cell.
Then, the RNC selects the target cell as follows:
• If there is only one inter-frequency neighboring cell that meets the load balancing DRD
conditions, the RNC selects this cell as the target cell.
• If there are multiple such cells, the RNC selects the cell with the lightest load as the
target cell.
• If there is no such cell, the RNC selects the current cell as the target cell.
3、The CAC algorithm makes an admission decision based on the status of the target cell.
• If the admission attempt is successful, the RNC accepts the service request.
• If the admission attempt fails, the RNC removes the cell from the candidate cells and
then choose next candidate cell.
4、If admission decisions have been made in all the candidate cells
•For HSPA access, the HSPA request falls back to a DCH one. Then, the algorithm goes
back to Step 1 to make an admission decision based on R99 service priorities.
•For DCH access, the RNC initiates an inter-RAT DRD.
Key parameters
z Power balance DRD switch on DCH
Parameter ID: LdbDrdSwitchDCH
z Power balance DRD switch on HSDPA

Parameter ID: LdbDrdSwitchHSDPA
z Max transmit power of cell

Parameter ID: MaxTxPower
The default value of this parameter is 430 (43dBm)
z Dl power balancing drd power threshold for DCH
Parameter ID: LdbDRDOffsetDCH
z Dl power balancing drd power threshold for HSDPA
Parameter ID: LdbDRDOffsetHSDPA
Power balancing drd switch

Parameter ID: PowerBalancingDrdSwitch
Content: This parameter specifies whether to enable the power-based load
balancing DRD algorithm .
Set this parameter through SET DRD / ADD CELLDRD
Max transmit power of cell
Parameter ID: MaxTxPower
Value range: 0 to 500 , step:0.1dBm
Content: This parameter specifies the sum of the maximum transmit power of
all the downlink channels in a cell.
The default value of this parameter is 430 (43dBm).
Set this parameter through MOD CELL
Power balancing drd offset
Parameter ID: LoadBalanceDRDOffset
Value range: 0% to 100%
Content: This parameter specifies the load offset threshold of the current cell
and the inter-frequency cell when power balancing drd algorithm is applied.
Only when the cell load offset reaches this threshold, the inter-frequency cell
can be selected to be the target drd cell.
z Inter-Frequency DRD procedure for Code Load Balance
The procedure of load balancing DRD based on code resource is similar to that based on power
resource.
1、The RNC determines whether the minimum remaining spreading factor of the current cell is
smaller than Minimum SF threshold for code balancing drd.
• If the minimum SF is smaller than Minimum SF threshold for code balancing drd, the
RNC tries the admission of the service request to the current cell.
• If the minimum SF is not smaller than Minimum SF threshold for code balancing drd,
the RNC performs the next step .
2、The RNC determines whether the code load of the current cell is lower than Code occupied
rate threshold for code balancing drd. .
• If the code load is lower than Code occupied rate threshold for code balancing drd,
the service tries the admission to the current cell.
• If the code load is not lower than Code occupied rate threshold for code balancing
drd, the RNC selects the cell with the lightest code load or the current cell as the target
cell.
3、The RNC selects the cell as follows:
• If the difference between the code resource occupancies of the cell and the current cell
is larger than the value of Delta code occupied rate , the RNC selects the cell with the
lightest code load as the target cell. Otherwise, the RNC selects the current cell as the
target cell.
Key parameters
z Code balancing drd switch
Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdSwitch
z Minimum SF threshold for code balancing drd

Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdMinSFThd
Code balancing drd switch

Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdSwitch
Content: This parameter specifies whether to enable the code-based load
balancing DRD algorithm.
Minimum SF threshold for code balancing drd

Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdMinSFThd
Value range: SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256
Content: If the downlink minimum SF of the best cell is below this threshold,
the code-based load balancing DRD is not triggered.
The default value of this parameter is SF8 .
Key parameters
z Code occupied rate threshold for code balancing drd
Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdCodeRateThd
z Delta code occupied rate

Parameter ID: DeltaCodeOccupiedRate
Code occupied rate threshold for code balancing drd

Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdCodeRateThd
Content: This parameter specifies the code occupancy threshold of the current cell for
code-based load balancing DRD.Only when the code occupancy of the best cell
reaches this threshold can code-based load balancing DRD be triggered.
The default value of this parameter is 13%.
Delta code occupied rate

Parameter ID: DeltaCodeOccupiedRate
Content: This parameter specifies the code occupied rate offset threshold of the
current cell and the inter-frequency cell when code balancing drd algorithm is applied.
Only when the code occupied rate offset reaches this threshold, the inter-frequency
cell can be selected to be the target drd cell.
The default value of this parameter is 7% .
Set this parameter through SET DRD
IAC – Inter-RAT DRD
z Inter-RAT DRD
Inter-RAT DRD is available for AMR service only in RAN 10:
The inter-RAT DRD procedure is as follows:

1,If the current cell is configured with any neighboring GSM cell suitable for blind handover
and the Service Handover Indicator is set to HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM,
the RNC performs next step. Otherwise, the service request undergoes preemption and
queuing.
2,The RNC generates a list of candidate DRD-supportive inter-RAT cells that fulfill the Ec/No
threshold.
3,The service request then tries admission to a target GSM cell in order of blind handover
priority.
4,If all admission attempts fail or the number of inter-RAT directed retries exceeds the value
of Max inter-RAT direct retry number, the service request undergoes preemption and
queuing.
Key parameters
z Max inter-RAT direct retry number
Parameter ID: DRMaxGSMNum
Max inter-RAT direct retry number

Parameter ID: DRMaxGSMNum
Value range: 0 to 5
Content: This parameter defines the maximum number of inter-RAT directed
retries for an RAB. The value 0 means that inter-RAT DRD is not allowed.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLDRD
IAC – Preemption and Queuing
z After cell admission fails, the RNC performs preemption
and Queuing
Precondition of Preemption and Queuing
– According to CN setting, Preemption and Queuing is supported
Target cell of Preemption and Queuing

– Based on DRD
Preemption and Queuing guarantees the success in the access of a higher-priority user
by forcibly releasing the resources of a lower-priority user.
After cell resource admission fails, the RNC performs Preemption and Queuing if the
following conditions are met:
The RNC receives an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message indicating that
Preemption and Queuing is supported.
By default, Preemption and Queuing setting in CN may be:
USER Preemption
Preemptable Queuing
LEVEL capability
High Able Not allowed allowed
Medium Able allowed allowed
Not
Low Not able allowed
allowed
Preemption and Queuing is applicable to the following cases:

Setup or modification of a service
Hard handover or SRNS relocation
UE state transits from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH
The RNC selects a suitable cell according to the settings of the DRD algorithms.
IAC – Preemption
z Preemption on different resources
Service Resource Service That can Be Preempted
R99 Service HSDPA Service R99 + HSPA Combined Service
R99 service Code √ - √
Power √ √ √
CE √ - √
Iub bandwidth √ √ √
HSDPA Code - - -
service
Power √ √ √
CE - - -
Iub bandwidth √ √ √
Number of - √ √
users
The preemption procedure is as follows:

1、The preemption algorithm determines which radio link sets can be preempted. The
algorithm proceeds as follows:
Chooses SRNC users first. If no user under the SRNC is available, the
algorithm chooses users under the DRNC.
Sorts the pre-emptable users by user integrate priority, or sorts the pre-
emptable RABs by RAB integrate priority.
Determines candidate users or RABs.
Only the users or RABs with priorities lower than the RAB to be
established are selected.
Selects as many users or RABs as necessary in order to match the resource
needed by the RAB to be established. When the priorities of two users or
RABs are the same, the algorithm chooses the user or RAB that can release
the most resources.
2、The RNC releases the resources occupied by the candidate users or RABs.
3、The requested service directly uses the released resources to access the network
without admission decision.
Key parameters
z Preempt algorithm switch
Parameter ID: PREEMPTALGOSWITCH
Preempt algorithm switch

Parameter ID: PREEMPTALGOSWITCH
Content: This parameter specifies whether to support the preemption function.
Set this parameter through SET QUEUEPREEMPT
IAC – Queuing
z After Preemption rejection, UE can wait in queue, then

admission attempts for the service are made periodically till
Tmax expires.
z Admission attempts are made based on Queuing priority:
Pqueue = Tmax – Telapsed

Tmax is the maximum time in the queue, default value is 5s
Telapsed is the time has queued
After the cell resource decision fails, the RNC performs queuing if the RNC receives an RAB
ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message indicating the queuing function is supported
The queuing algorithm checks whether the queue is full, that is, whether the number of service
requests in the queue exceeds the queue length that is defined by the Queue length
The queuing algorithm is triggered by the heartbeat timer, which is set through the Poll timer
length .
If the queue is not full:
• Stamps this request with the current time.
• Puts this request into the queue.
If the queue is full:
• Checks whether there are requests whose integrate priorities are lower than that of
the priority of the new request. If there is, delete the low priority request, put the new
service in the queue. (Otherwise, the queuing algorithm rejects the new request
directly.)
• Stamps the new request with the current time and then puts it into the queue.
After the heartbeat timer (Poll timer length) expires, the queuing algorithm proceeds as follows:
• Selects the request with the highest integrate priority for an attempt of resource
allocation .
• If the attempt fails, the queuing algorithm proceeds as follows:
• Puts the service request back into the queue with the time stamp
unchanged for the next attempt.
• Chooses the request with the greatest weight from the rest and makes
another attempt until a request is accepted or all requests are rejected.
Key parameters
z Queue algorithm switch
Parameter ID: QUEUEALGOSWITCH
z Queue length
Parameter ID: QUEUELEN
Queue algorithm switch

Parameter ID: QUEUEALGOSWITCH
Content: This parameter specifies whether to support the queuing function.
Queue length
Parameter ID: QUEUELEN
Content: This parameter defines the length of a queue.
Key parameters
z Poll timer length
Parameter ID: POLLTIMERLEN
z Max queuing time length

Parameter ID: MAXQUEUETIMELEN
Poll timer length

Parameter ID: POLLTIMERLEN
Value range: 1 to 6000 , step: 10ms
Content: This parameter defines the length of the heartbeat timer. Each time the timer
expires, the RNC chooses the service that meets the requirement to make an
admission attempt .
Max queuing time length

Parameter ID: MAXQUEUETIMELEN
Value range: 1 to 60s
Content: This parameter defines the maximum time that the service request can be in
the queue.
Contents

LCC (Load Congestion Control)
Load%
100%
Overload state: OLC will be
section A
used
THOLC
1 2
section B
Basic congestion state: LDR
THLDR
will be used
section C
Normal state: Permit entry
Times
LCC (Load Congestion Control) consist of LDR (Load Reshuffling) and OLC (Over Load
Control).
In basic congestion state, LDR will be used to optimize resource distribution, the main
rules is not to affect the feeling of users as possible as we can.
In overload state, OLC will be used to release overload state quickly, keep system stability
and the service of high priority users.
Load Reshuffling
z Reasons
When the cell is in basic congestion state, new coming calls
could be easily rejected by system
z Purpose
Optimizing cell resource distribution
Decreasing load level, increasing admission successful rate
When the usage of cell resource exceeds the basic congestion triggering threshold, the
cell enters the basic congestion state. In this case, LDR is required to reduce the cell load
and increase the access success rate.
Load Reshuffling
z Triggering of LDR
Power resources
Code resource
Iub resources
NodeB Credit resource
For power resource, the RNC performs periodic measurement and checks whether the
cells are congested. For code, Iub, and NodeB credit resources, event-triggered congestion
applies, that is, the RNC checks whether the cells are congested when resource usage
changes.
Load Reshuffling
z LDR Actions:
Inter-frequency load handover
Code reshuffling
BE service rate reduction
AMR rate reduction
Inter-RAT load handover in the CS domain
Inter-RAT load handover in the PS domain
Real time service Iu QoS renegotiation
MBMS power reduction
When the cell is in basic congestion state, the RNC takes one of the actions in each
period until the congestion is resolved
Load Reshuffling Actions triggered by different resources
If the downlink power admission uses the equivalent user number algorithm, basic congestion can also be
triggered by the equivalent number of users. In this situation, LDR actions do not involve AMR rate
reduction or MBMS power reduction, as indicated by the symbol "*" in above table
Congestion of different resource may trigger different actions.

For example, Credit congestion do not trigger “Inter-Frequency Load Handover”, “AMR Rate
Reduction”, and “Code Reshuffling”
When congestion of all resources is triggered, the action to be taken is based on the resource priority
configuration.
Key parameters
Parameter ID: NBMLDCALGOSWITCH
UL_UU_LDR
DL_UU_LDR
CELL_CODE_LDR
z NodeB LDC algorithm switch

Parameter ID: NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch
IUB_LDR
NODEB_CREDIT_LDR

Content: If ULLDR, DLLDR, CELL_CODE_LDR are selected, the corresponding
algorithms are enabled. .
NodeB LDC algorithm switch

Parameter ID: NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch
Content: If IUB_LDR, NODEB_CREDIT_LDR, are selected, the corresponding
algorithms will be enabled; otherwise, disabled. .
Set this parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA / MOD NODEBALGOPARA /
SET LDCALGOPARA
Key parameters
z UL (RTWP) LDR trigger threshold
Parameter ID: ULLDRTRIGTHD
z UL (RTWP) LDR release threshold

Parameter ID: ULLDRRELTHD
UL LDR trigger threshold

Parameter ID: ULLDRTRIGTHD
Value range: 0 to 100 , %
Content: If the UL load of the cell is not lower than this threshold, the UL load
reshuffling function of the cell is triggered.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDM/MOD CELLLDM
UL LDR release threshold

Parameter ID: ULLDRRELTHD
Content: If the UL load of the cell is lower than this threshold, the UL load reshuffling
function of the cell is stopped.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDM / MOD CELLLDM
Key parameters
z DL (TX POWER) LDR trigger threshold
Parameter ID: DLLDRTRIGTHD
z DL (TX POWER) LDR release threshold

Parameter ID: DLLDRRELTHD
DL LDR trigger threshold

Parameter ID: DLLDRTRIGTHD
Content: If the DL load of the cell is not lower than this threshold, the DL load
reshuffling function of the cell is triggered.
DL LDR release threshold

Parameter ID: DLLDRRELTHD
Content: If the DL load of the cell is lower than this threshold, the DL load reshuffling
function of the cell is stopped.
Key parameters
z Cell LDR SF reserved threshold
Parameter ID: CELLLDRSFRESTHD
z Ul LDR Credit SF reserved threshold

Parameter ID: ULLDRCREDITSFRESTHD
z Dl LDR Credit SF reserved threshold

Parameter ID: DLLDRCREDITSFRESTHD
Cell LDR SF reserved threshold

Parameter ID: CELLLDRSFRESTHD
Value range: SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256
Content: If the SF corresponding to the current remaining code of the cell is higher than
the threshold defined by this parameter, code congestion is triggered and the related
handling actions are taken.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDR / MOD CELLLDR
Ul LDR Credit SF reserved threshold
Parameter ID: ULLDRCREDITSFRESTHD
Content: If the SF corresponding to the current UL remaining credit resource is higher
than the threshold defined by this parameter, the UL credit LDR can be performed and
the related handling actions are taken.
Set this parameter through ADD NODEBLDR/MOD NODEBLDR
Dl LDR Credit SF reserved threshold
Parameter ID: DLLDRCREDITSFRESTHD
Content: If the value of SF corresponding to the current DL remaining credit resource is
higher than the threshold defined by this parameter, the DL credit LDR can be
performed and the related handling actions are taken.
Set this parameter through ADD NODEBLDR/MOD NODEBLDR
Key parameters
z The First / Second/ Third/ Fourth priority for load reshuffling
Parameter ID:
LdrFirstPri
LdrSecondPri
LdrThirdPri
LdrFourthPri
The default configuration is :

IUBLDR > CREDITLDR > CODELDR > UULDR
The First / Second/ Third/ Fourth priority for load reshuffling

Parameter ID: LdrFirstPri / LdrSecondPri / LdrThirdPri / LdrFourthPri
Value range: IUBLDR(Iub load reshuffling), CREDITLDR(Credit load reshuffling),
CODELDR (Code load reshuffling), UULDR (Uu load reshuffling)
Content: These parameters specify the triggering resource order when congestion of all
resources are triggered.
The default configuration is IUBLDR > CREDITLDR > CODELDR > UULDR
Set this parameter through SET LDCALGOPARA
LDR procedure
Turn on LDR algorithm switch
Mark "current LDR state = uncongested"
Start LDM congestion indication report
Mark "current action = first LDR action"
Clear "selected" mark of all UE LDR actions

Congestion
state indication
Wait for congestion indication
N
Current LDR state = congested?
Inter-freq Y
Succeed?
load handover
N
Code Y
Succeed?
reshuffling
N
BE rate Y
Succeed?
reduction
N
Sequence of Inter-system
Y
actions can be handover Succeed? Mark
in CS domain Wait time
configured N "current action
for LDR
(current action Inter-system = successful
Y action duration
is taken firstly) handover Succeed? action"
in PS domain
N
AMR rate Y
Succeed?
reduction
N
QoS renogiation Y
Succeed?
on Iu interface
N
MBMS power Y
Succeed?
reduction
N
No related action can be found
Mark "current action = first LDR action"
Key parameters
z LDR period timer length
Parameter ID: LDRPERIODTIMERLE
z Gold User Load Control Switch

Parameter ID: GoldUserLoadControlSwitch
LDR period timer length

Parameter ID: LDRPERIODTIMERLE
Value range: 0 to 86400 s
Content: This parameter specifies the period of load reshuffling .
Gold User Load Control Switch

Parameter ID: GoldUserLoadControlSwitch
Content: This parameter specifies whether LDR actions are applicable to users of gold
priority.
Key parameters
z DL LDR first / second / third / fourth / fifth / sixth / seventh /
eighth / ninth / tenth action
Parameter ID:
DlLdrFirstAction / DlLdrSecondAction / DlLdrThirdAction /
DlLdrFourthAction / DlLdrFifthAction / DlLdrSixthAction /
DlLdrSeventhAction / DlLdrEighthAction / DlLdrNinthAction /
DlLdrTenthAction
The default configuration is :

1st:CODEADJ , 2nd: INTERFREQLDHO , 3rd: BERATERED
DL LDR first / second / third / fourth / fifth / sixth / seventh / eighth / ninth / tenth action
Parameter ID: DlLdrFirstAction / DlLdrSecondAction / DlLdrThirdAction /
DlLdrFourthAction / DlLdrFifthAction / DlLdrSixthAction / DlLdrSeventhAction /
DlLdrEighthAction / DlLdrNinthAction / DlLdrTenthAction
Value range: NOACT (NO ACTION), INTERFREQLDHO (INTER-FREQ LOAD
HANDOVER), BERATERED (BE TRAFF RATE REDUCTION), QOSRENEGO
(UNCONTROLLED REAL-TIME TRAFF QOS RE-NEGOTIATION),
CSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO (CS DOMAIN INTER-RAT SHOULD BE LOAD
HANDOVER), PSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO (PS DOMAIN INTER-RAT SHOULD
BE LOAD HANDOVER), AMRRATERED (AMR TRAFF RATE REDUCTION),
MBMSDECPOWER(MBMS DESCEND POWER), CODEADJ(CODE ADJUST),
CSINTERRATSHOULDNOTLDHO (CS DOMAIN INTER-RAT SHOULD NOT BE
LOAD HANDOVER), PSINTERRATSHOULDNOTLDHO (PS DOMAIN INTER-RAT
SHOULD NOT BE LOAD HANDOVER).
Content: These parameters specify the LDR action order.
The default configuration is 1st:CODEADJ , 2nd: INTERFREQLDHO , 3rd:
BERATERED ,
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDR / MOD CELLLDR / ADD NODEBLDR /
MOD NODEBLDR
LDR Actions
z Inter-frequency load handover
Target users
Based on user integrate priority
Current bandwidth for DCH or “GBR bandwidth for HSPA” has to be less
than the UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover maximum bandwidth
parameter
Target cells
Load difference between current load and the basic congestion trigger
threshold of target cell is larger than “UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover
load space threshold”
It is implemented as follows:
1. The LDR check whether the existing cell has a target cell of inter-frequency blind handover. If there is no
such a target cell, the action fails, and the LDR performs the next action.
2. The principles of selecting inter-freq handover target cell are different as a result of the different resources
which trigger the basic congestion.
1. If the basic congestion is triggered by the power resource:
The LDR checks whether the load difference between the current load and the basic congestion triggering
threshold of each target cell for blink handover is larger than the UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover load
space threshold (both the uplink and downlink conditions must be fulfilled). The other resources (code
resource, Iub bandwidth, and NodeB credit resource) in the target cell do not trigger basic congestion.
If the difference is not larger than the threshold, the action fails, and the LDR takes the next action.
If there are more than one cell meeting the requirements, the first one is selected as the blind handover
target cell.
2. If the basic congestion is triggered by the code resource:
Weather there are blind handover target cells meeting the requirements is decided by the following
conditions:
The minimum SF of the target cell is not greater than that of current cell.
The difference of code occupy rate between current cell and the target cell is greater than InterFreq HO
code used ratio space threshold.
The state of target cell is normal.
If there is no such cell, this action fails and the LDR performs the next action. If there are more than one cell
meeting the requirements, the first cell is selected as the blind handover target cell.
3. If the LDR finds out a target cell that meets the specified blind handover conditions, the LDR selects one UE
to make an inter-frequency blind handover, depending on the UE’s ARP and occupied bandwidth. For the
selected UE other than a gold user, its UL/DL current bandwidth for DCH, GBR bandwidth for HSPA, shall be
less than and have the least difference from the UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover maximum bandwidth
parameter (Both the uplink and downlink condition must be fulfilled). If the LDR cannot find such a UE, the
action fails. The LDR performs the next action.
Key parameters
z UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover load space threshold
Parameter ID: UL/DLINTERFREQHOCELLLOADSPACETHD
z InterFreq HO code used ratio space threshold

Parameter ID: LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd
z UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover maximum bandwidth

Parameter ID: UL/DLINTERFREQHOBWTHD
UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover load space threshold

Parameter ID: UL/DLINTERFREQHOCELLLOADSPACETHD
Content: The target cell can be a cell for inter-frequency blind handover only when the
UL/DL load space is higher than the threshold.
The UL/DL load space is the difference between the UL/DL basic congestion triggering
threshold and the current UL/DL load of a target cell for blind handover. .
InterFreq HO code used ratio space threshold

Parameter ID: LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd
Value range: 0% to 100% (0~1) ,step:1%
Content: The target cell can be used for inter-frequency blind handover only when the
DL Code used ratio space is higher than the threshold. The DL Code used ratio space
is the difference of code used ratio between the source cell and the target cell.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDR / LST CELLLDR / MOD CELLLDR
UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover maximum bandwidth

Parameter ID: UL/DLINTERFREQHOBWTHD
Value range: 0 to 400000 bps
Content: During the inter-frequency load handover, the UE is selected as the target of
inter-frequency load handover from the UE set where the bandwidth is less than this
threshold.
LDR Actions
z BE Rate Reduction
Target RABs
Based on RAB integrate priority
The data rate of BE service is larger than GBR
Number of RABs to be selected is configurable
BE rate reduction is implemented by reconfiguring the bandwidth. Bandwidth

reconfiguration requires signaling interaction on the Uu interface.
The LDR algorithm is implemented as follows:
1. Based on the integrate priority, the LDR sorts the RABs into a descending order. The
top RABs related to the BE services (whose current rate is higher than its GBR
configured by SET USERGBR command) are selected. If the integrate priorities of
some RABs are identical, the RAB with the highest rate is selected. The number of
RABs to select is determined by the UL/DL LDR-BE rate reduction RAB number
parameter.
2. The bandwidth of the selected services is reduced to the specified rate.
3. If services can be selected, the action is successful. If services cannot be selected, the
action fails. The LDR takes the next action.
4. The reconfiguration is completed as indicated by the RB RECONFIGURATION
message on the Uu interface and through the RL RECONFIGURATION message on
the Iub interface.
5. The BE rate reduction algorithm is controlled by the DCCC algorithm switch. BE rate
reduction can be performed only when the DCCC algorithm is enabled.
Key parameters
z UL /DL LDR-BE rate reduction RAB number
Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
UL /DL LDR-BE rate reduction RAB number

Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
Content: These parameters specify the number of RABs to select in a UL/DL LDR BE
rate reduction.
If the number of RABs that fulfil the criteria for BE rate reduction is smaller than the
value of this parameter, then all the RABs that fulfil the criteria are selected.
LDR Actions
z Uncontrolled Real-time service QoS Renegotiation
Target RABs
Real-time services in the PS domain
The load is reduced by adjusting the rate of the real-time services through uncontrolled real-
time OoS renegotiation.
Upon receipt of the message, the CN sends the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message
to the RNC for RAB parameter reconfiguration. Based on this function, the RNC can
adjust the rate of real-time services to reduce the load.
1. Based on the integrate priority, the LDR sorts the real-time services in the PS domain in
descending order. The top services are selected for QoS renegotiation.
2. The LDR performs QoS renegotiation for the selected services. The GBR during
service setup is the rate of the service after QoS renegotiation.
3. The RNC initiates the RAB Modification Request message to the CN for QoS
renegotiation.
4. If the RNC cannot find a proper service for QoS renegotiation, the action fails. The LDR
performs the next action.
Key parameters
z UL / DL LDR un-ctrl RT Qos re-nego RAB num
Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM
UL / DL LDR un-ctrl RT Qos re-nego RAB num

Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM
Content: These parameters specify the number of RABs to select in a UL/DL LDR
uncontrolled real-time QoS renegotiation.
If the number of RABs that fulfil the criteria for uncontrolled real-time QoS renegotiation
is smaller than the value of this parameter, then all the RABs that fulfil the criteria are
selected.
LDR Actions
z Inter-system Handover In the CS/PS Domain
Target user
Based on the user integrate priority
Handover Indicator
– “Handover to GSM should be performed”
– "handover to GSM should not be performed"
GSM cell
WCDMA cell
The 2G and 3G systems have different cell sizes and coverage modes. Therefore, blind
handover across systems is not taken into account.
The LDR is implemented in the downlink (e.g.) as follows:
1. Based on the integrate priority, the LDR sorts the UEs in descending order. The top
CS/PS services are selected.
2. For the selected UEs, the LDR sends the load handover command to the inter-system
handover module to ask the UEs to hand over to the 2G system.
3. The handover module decides to trigger inter-system handover, depending on the
capability of the UE and the capability of the algorithm switch to support the
compression mode.
4. This action is successful if any load handover UE is found. Otherwise, this action fails.
Key parameters
z UL / DL CS should be ho user number
Parameter ID: UL/DLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
z UL / DL CS should not be ho user number

Parameter ID: UL/DLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUENUM
UL / DL CS should be ho user number

Parameter ID: UL/DLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
Content: These parameters specify the number of users to select in a UL/DL Inter-RAT
Should Be Load Handover in the CS Domain.
If the number of users that fulfil the criteria for Inter-RAT Should Be Load Handover in the
CS Domain is smaller than the value of this parameter, then all the users that fulfil the
criteria are selected.
UL / DL CS should not be ho user number

Parameter ID: UL/DLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUENUM
Should Not Be Load Handover in the CS Domain.
If the number of users that fulfil the criteria for Inter-RAT Should Not Be Load Handover
in the CS Domain is smaller than the value of this parameter, then all the users that fulfil
the criteria are selected.
Key parameters
z UL / DL PS should be ho user number
Parameter ID: UL/DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
z UL / DL PS should not be ho user number

Parameter ID: UL/DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUENUM
UL / DL PS should be ho user number

Parameter ID: UL/DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
Should Be Load Handover in the PS Domain.
If the number of users that fulfil the criteria for Inter-RAT Should Be Load Handover in
the PS Domain is smaller than the value of this parameter, then all the users that fulfil
UL / DL PS should not be ho user number

Parameter ID: UL/DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUENUM
Should Not Be Load Handover in the PS Domain.
If the number of users that fulfil the criteria for Inter-RAT Should Not Be Load Handover
in the PS Domain is smaller than the value of this parameter, then all the users that fulfil
LDR Actions
z AMR Rate Reduction
Target user
AMR services and with the bit rate higher than the GBR
In the WCDMA system, voice services work in eight AMR modes. Each mode has its own
rate. Therefore, mode control is functionally equal to rate control.
1. Based on the integrate priority, the LDR sorts the RABs in the descending order. The top
UEs accessing the AMR services (conversational) and with the bit rate higher than the
GBR are selected.
2. In uplink, the RNC sends the “Rate Control request” message through the Iu-UP to the
CN to adjust the AMR rate to the GBR.
3. In downlink, The RNC sends the TFC CONTROL command to the UE to adjust the AMR
rate to the assured rate.
4. If the RNC cannot find a proper service for AMR rate reduction, the action fails. The LDR
performs the next action.
Key parameters
z UL/DL LDR-AMR rate reduction RAB number
Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
UL/DL LDR-AMR rate reduction RAB number

Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
Content: These parameters specify the number of RABs to select in a UL/DL LDR AMR
rate reduction.
If the number of RABs that fulfil the criteria for AMR rate reduction is smaller than the
value of this parameter, then all the RABs that fulfil the criteria are selected.
LDR Actions
z Code Reshuffling
Reallocate code resources for candidate user
Code Adjustment
The algorithm operates as follows:

1,Initialize the SF_Cur of the root node of subtrees to Cell LDR SF reserved threshold.
2,Traverse all the subtrees with this SF_Cur at the root node. Leaving the subtrees
occupied by common channels and HSDPA channels out of account, take the
subtrees in which the number of users is not larger than the value of the Max user
number of code adjust parameter as candidates for code reshuffling.
3,Select a subtree from the candidates according to the setting of the LDR code priority
indicator parameter.
z If this parameter is set to TRUE, select the subtree with the largest code
number from the candidates.
z If this parameter is set to FALSE, select the subtree with the smallest
number of users from the candidates. In the case that multiple subtrees have
the same number of users, select the subtree with the largest code number.
4,Treat each user in the subtree as a new user and allocate code resources to each user.
5,Initiate the reconfiguration procedure for each user in the subtree and reconfigure the
channel codes of the users to the newly allocated code resources.
The reconfiguration procedure on the air interface is implemented through the PHYSICAL
CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message and that on the Iub interface through the
RL RECONFIGURATION message.
Key parameters
z Max user number of code adjust
Parameter ID: MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ
z LDR code priority indicator

Parameter ID: LdrCodePriUseInd
The default value of this parameter is TRUE
Max user number of code adjust

Parameter ID: MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ
Value range: 1 to 3
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of users that can be selected
whenever code reshuffling is performed.
LDR code priority indicator

Parameter ID: LdrCodePriUseInd
Value range: True, False
Content: This parameter specifies whether to select preferentially the subtree with a
relatively large code number during subtree selection.
LDR Actions
z MBMS Power Reduction
Purpose
The downlink power load can be reduced by lowering power on
MBMS traffic channels

1. Select all RABs with low priorities.
2. The RNC initiates the reconfiguration procedure and resets the transmit power of
MTCH (FACH) to the minimum value. The transmit power corresponds to the MBMS
service.
3. The reconfiguration procedure on the Iub interface is implemented through the
COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST message.
Contents

Over Load Control
z Reasons
In overload state, system is not stable
z Purpose
Ensuring the system stability and making the system back to
the normal state as soon as possible
z Triggering of Over Load

Power resource
After the UE access is granted, the power consumed by a single link is adjusted by the
single link power control algorithm. The power varies with the mobility of the UE and the
changes in the environment and the source rate. In some situations, the total power load of
the cell may be higher than the target load. To ensure system stability, overload congestion
must be handled.
Over Load Control
z Over Load triggering
If the current UL/DL load of an R99 cell is not lower than the UL/DL OLC Trigger
threshold for some hysteresis (defined by the DL State Trans Hysteresis threshold in
DL; not configurable in UL), the cell works in overload congestion state and the related
overload handling action is taken. If the current UL/DL load of the R99 cell is lower than the
UL/DL OLC Release threshold for some hysteresis (defined by the DL State Trans
Hysteresis threshold in DL; not configurable in UL), the cell comes back to the normal
state.
The HSPA cell has the same uplink decision criterion as the R99 cell. The load in the
downlink, however, is the sum of load of the non-HSPA power (transmitted carrier power of
all codes not used for HS-PDSCH or HS-SCCH transmission) and the GBP..
Key parameters
UL_UU_OLC, DL_UU_OLC
z UL/DL OLC trigger threshold

Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCTRIGTHD
z UL/DL OLC release threshold

Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCRELTHD

Content: This parameter specifies the switch of UL/DL OLC.
UL_UU_OLC: UL overload control algorithm
DL_UU_OLC: DL overload control algorithm
UL/DL OLC trigger threshold

Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCTRIGTHD
Content: If the UL load of the cell is not lower than the value of the UL OLC trigger
threshold, the UL overload congestion control of the cell is activated.
If the DL load of the cell is not lower than the value of the DL OLC trigger threshold,
the DL overload congestion control of the cell is activated.
UL/DL OLC release threshold

Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCRELTHD
Content: If the UL load of the cell is lower than the value of the UL OLC release
threshold, the UL overload congestion control of the cell is deactivated.
If the DL load of the cell is lower than the value of the DL OLC release threshold, the
DL overload congestion control of the cell is deactivated.
The general OLC procedure covers the following actions: TF control of BE services, channel
switching of BE services, and release of RABs. The RNC takes periodical actions if overload
congestion is detected.
When the cell is overloaded, the RNC takes one of the following actions in each period (defined by
the OLC period timer length parameter, e.g.3s) until the congestion is resolved:
1. TF control of BE service (only for DCH BE service)
2. Switching BE services to common channel
3. Choosing and releasing the RABs (for HSPA or DCH service)
If the first action fails or the first action is completed but the cell is still in congestion, then the
second action is taken.
Key parameters
z OLC period timer length
Parameter ID: OLCPERIODTIMERLEN
The default value of this parameter is 3000 (ms)
OLC period timer length

Parameter ID: OLCPERIODTIMERLEN
Content: This parameter specifies the period of overload control.
OLC Action
z TF Control
Target user
The RABs with the DCH BE services
Execution
The RNC sends the “TF control indication” message to the MAC.
MAC restricts the TFC selection :

TFmax(N+1) = TFmax(N) x Ratelimitcoeff
Based on the RAB integrate priority, the OLC sorts the RABs into a descending order.The
following RABs are selected:
1. The RABs with the DCH BE services
2. The RABs with the lowest integrate priority.
3. The number of RABs selected is DL/UL OLC fast TF restrict RAB number.
The RNC sends the TF control indication message to the MAC. Each MAC of selected
RABs will receive one TF control indication message and will restrict the TFC selection
of the BE services to reduce the data rate step by step.
MAC restricts the TFC selection in a way like that the maximum TB number is calculated
with the formula:
TFmax(N+1) = TFmax(N) x Ratelimitcoeff
Ratelimitcoeff is a configurable parameter (DL OLC fast TF restrict data rate restrict
coefficient).
If the RNC cannot find an appropriate service for the TF control or the time for performing
the TF control exceed the DL OLC fast TF restrict times parameter, the action fails.
The OLC performs the next action.
If the congestion is released, the RNC sends the congestion release indication to the MAC.
At the same time, the rate recovery timer (whose length is defined by DL OLC fast TF
restrict data rate recover timer length) is started. When this timer is expired, the
MAC increases the data rate step by step.
MAC recovers the TFC selection by calculating the maximum TB number with the formula:
TFmax(N+1) = TFmax(N) x RateRecoverCoeff
RateRecoverCoeff is a configurable parameter (DL TF rate recover coefficient)
OLC Action
z TF Control example
Before point A, the cell is not in OLC state. The downlink data transfer rate is 384 kbit/s, the
corresponding TF is 12 x 336, and TFS is {12 x 336, 8 x 336, 4 x 336, 2 x 336, 1 x 336,
0 x 336}.336 is the TB size, 320 payload + 16 MAC head
At point A, the cell enters OLC state. The RNC selects this RAB to do fast TF restriction.
MAC restricts the TFC selection during time between point A and point B by calculating
the maximum TB number as follows:
TFmax(1) = TFmax(0) x Ratelimitcoeff = 12 x 0.68 = 8.16
Match 8.16 and the TFS. Therefore, the maximum TB number is 8.
At point B, MAC performs further TFC restriction by calculating maximum TB number as
follows:
TFmax(2) = TFmax(1) x Ratelimitcoeff = 8 x 0.68 = 5.44
Match 5.44 and the TFS. Then, the maximum TB number is 4.
At point C and point D, similar process is followed.
Key parameters
z UL/DL OLC fast TF restrict RAB number
Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCFTFRSTRCTRABNUM
z UL/DL OLC fast TF restrict times

Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCFTFRSTRCTTIMES
UL/DL OLC fast TF restrict RAB number

Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCFTFRSTRCTRABNUM
Content: These parameters specify the maximum number of RABs selected in a fast
TF restriction of UL/DL OLC.
If the number of RABs that fulfil the criteria for TF control is smaller than the value of
this parameter, then all the RABs that fulfil the criteria are selected.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLOLC / MOD CELLOLC
UL/DL OLC fast TF restrict times

Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCFTFRSTRCTTIMES
Content: These parameters specify the times of UL/DL OLC fast TF restrictions that
are executed.
Key parameters
z DL TF rate restrict coefficient
Parameter ID: RateRstrctCoef
z DL TF rate restrict timer length

Parameter ID: RateRstrctTimerLen
DL TF rate restrict coefficient

Parameter ID: RateRstrctCoef
Content: This parameter specifies the data rate restriction coefficient in the fast TF
restriction. The smaller the parameter is, the more effective the TF restriction is. After
receiving the TF control indication, the MAC obtains the maximum TF format with the
formula TFmax' = TFmax x Ratelimitcoeff .
The default value of this parameter is 68 %
DL TF rate restrict timer length

Parameter ID: RateRstrctTimerLen
Value range: 1 to 65535 ms
Content: This parameter specifies the length of the data rate restriction timer in the fast
TF restriction. The smaller the value of this parameter is, the more effective the TF
restriction is.
The default value of this parameter is 3000 ms
Key parameters
z DL TF rate recover timer length
Parameter ID: RateRecoverTimerLen
z DL TF rate recover coefficient

Parameter ID: RecoverCoef
The default value of this parameter is 130 %
DL TF rate recover timer length

Parameter ID: RateRecoverTimerLen
Value range: 1 to 65535 ms
Content: This parameter specifies the length of the data rate recovery timer. The
smaller the value of this parameter is, the faster the BE traffic rate increases after the
congestion is resolved.
The default value of this parameter is 5000 ms
DL TF rate recover coefficient

Parameter ID: RecoverCoef
Content: This parameter specifies the data rate recovery coefficient in the fast TF
restriction. The larger the parameter is, the larger the TF recover effect. After receiving
congestion release indication, the MAC obtains the maximum TF format with the
formula TFmax' = TFmax x RateRecovercoeff.
OLC Action
z Switching BE Services to Common Channel
Target user
Based on the user integrate priority
The users with the DCH or HSDPA BE services in PS
Execution
The RNC sends “RB Reconfiguration” message to UE
UE make a response by “RB Reconfiguration Complete”
The OLC algorithm for switching BE services to common channel operates as follows:
Based on the user integrate priority, the OLC sorts all UEs that only have PS services
including HSPA and DCH services (except UEs having also a streaming bearer) into a
descending order.
The top N UEs are selected. The number of selected UEs is equal to Transfer Common
Channel user number. If UEs cannot be selected, the action fails. The OLC performs the
next action.
The selected UEs are switched to common channel.
Key parameters
z Transfer Common Channel User number
Parameter ID: TransCchUserNum
Transfer Common Channel User number

Parameter ID: TransCchUserNum
Content: This parameter specifies the transfer common channel user number
Set this parameter through ADD CELLOLC / LST CELLOLC / MOD CELLOLC
OLC Action
z Release of Some RABs
Target user
Based on the RAB integrate priority
DCH services RAB
Execution
The RNC sends “IU Release Request” message to CN
The RNC sends “RRC Connection Release” message to UE
OLC Algorithm for the Release of Some RABs in the Uplink:

The OLC algorithm for the release of some RABs in the uplink operates as follows:
Based on the integrate priority, the OLC sorts all RABs including HSUPA and DCH services
into a descending order.
The top RABs selected. If the integrate priorities of some RABs are identical, the RAB with
higher rate (current rate for DCH RAB and GBR for HSUPA RAB) in the uplink is
selected. The number of selected RABs is equal to UL OLC traff release RAB number.
The selected RABs are released directly.
OLC Algorithm for the Release of Some RABs in the Downlink
The OLC algorithm for the release of some RABs in the downlink operates as follows:
Based on the integrate priority, the OLC sorts all RABs into a descending order.
The top-priority RABs are selected. If the integrate priorities of some RABs are identical,
the RAB with higher rate (current rate) The number of selected RABs is equal to DL
OLC traff release RAB number.
The selected RABs are directly released.
Key parameters
z UL/DL OLC traff release RAB number
Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCTRAFFRELRABNUM
UL/DL OLC traff release RAB number

Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCTRAFFRELRABNUM
Content: Either parameter specifies the number of RABs released in a UL or DL OLC
release action.
If the number of RABs that fulfil the criteria for release is smaller than the value of this
parameter, then all the RABs that fulfil the criteria are selected.
Summary
PUC (Potential User Control)
LDB (Intra-Frequency Load Balancing)
CAC (Call Admission Control)
IAC (Intelligent Admission Control)
LDR (Load Reshuffling)
OLC (Overload Control)

Thank You
www.huawei.com

WCDMA RAN Planning and Optimization Features and Algorithms - 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WCDMA RAN Planning and Optimization Features and Algorithms - 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WCDMA UE Behaviors

Copyright © 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

 System information reception

 Cell selection and reselection

z UE has UTRAN carrier information

Frame synchronization and

Primary Scrambling code

z Step 1: Slot synchronization

z The UE selects a PLMN from HPLMNs or VPLMNs.

 Manual PLMN Selection Mode

z The priority order for automatic PLMN selection mode

Order PLMN type Remark

1 HPLMNs Home PLMNs

PLMNs contained in the "User Controlled PLMN

 SIB (System Information Block )

z There are four states involved in cell selection:

 Any cell selection

 Camped on any cell

 Stored information cell selection

z Criterion S : Srxlev > 0 & Squal > 0, where:

S qual = Qqualmeas − Qqual min

Squal Cell quality value (dB)

Srxlev Cell RX level value (dBm)

Qqualmin Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB)

Qrxlevmin Minimum required RX level in the cell (dBm)

Pcompensation Max（UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH-P_MAX，0）, dBm

P_MAX Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm)

 Recommended value: CPICH_ECNO

 Recommended value: -18, namely -18dB

 Recommended value: -58, namely -115dBm

 Recommended value: 21, namely 21dBm

Qqualmeas − Qqualmin ≤ Sintrasearch

Qqualmeas ≤ Qqualmin + Sintrasearch

z Parameters of the measurement start criteria

Qqualmeas − Qqualmin ≤ Sintersearch

Qqualmeas ≤ Qqualmin + Sintersearch

z Parameters of the measurement start criteria

Qqualmeas − Qqualmin ≤ SsearchRATm

Qqualmeas ≤ Qqualmin + SsearchRATm

z Parameters of the measurement start criteria

 Recommended value: None

 Recommended value: None

 Recommended value: None

 Recommended value: None

 Recommended value: None

z The cell-ranking criterion R is defined by :

 Parameter name: Hysteresis 1 for idle mode

 Recommended value: 2, namely 4dB

 Parameter name: Hysteresis 1 for connect mode

 Recommended value: 2, namely 4dB

 Parameter name: Hysteresis 2 for idle mode

 Recommended value: Qhyst1s for idle mode

 Parameter name: Hysteresis 2 for connected mode

 Recommended value: Qhyst1s for connected mode.

 Recommended value: 1, namely 1s.

 Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB.

 Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB.

 Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB.

 Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB.

 Route update (for GPRS)

 Recommended value: 10, namely 60min

 Recommended value: ALLOWED

z UTRAN initiated paging

System information reception

Cell selection and reselection

Manual PLMN Selection Mode

SIB (System Information Block )

Any cell selection

Camped on any cell

Stored information cell selection

Recommended value: CPICH_ECNO

Recommended value: -18, namely -18dB

Recommended value: -58, namely -115dBm

Recommended value: 21, namely 21dBm

Recommended value: None

Recommended value: None

Recommended value: None

Recommended value: None

Recommended value: None

Parameter name: Hysteresis 1 for idle mode

Recommended value: 2, namely 4dB

Parameter name: Hysteresis 1 for connect mode

Recommended value: 2, namely 4dB

Parameter name: Hysteresis 2 for idle mode

Recommended value: Qhyst1s for idle mode

Parameter name: Hysteresis 2 for connected mode

Recommended value: Qhyst1s for connected mode.

Recommended value: 1, namely 1s.

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB.

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB.

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB.

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB.

Route update (for GPRS)

Recommended value: 10, namely 60min

Recommended value: ALLOWED

Recommended value: V36.

After releasing RRC connection, UE will switch to the idle

Access class 11~Access Class 15

Recommended value: D2000, namely 2000ms

Recommended value: 6, namely 6s

Recommended value: D1, namely 1

Recommended value: none

Recommended value: none

Recommended value: SUPPORT

Explain open loop power control and parameters

Explain inner loop power control and relevant parameters

Explain outer loop power control and relevant parameters

Uplink / Downlink Outer Loop Power Control

1. to decide the initial transmission power of PRACH preamble.

2. to decide the initial transmission power of DPCCH / DPDCH.

The PCPICH power is defined by the PCPICH TRANSMIT POWER parameter

The recommended value is 430, namely 43dBm

The recommended value is 330, namely 33dBm

Parameter name: Max transmit power of cell

Value Range: 0 to 500

Physical Value Range: 0dBm to 50 dBm, step 0.1dB

The recommended value is 430, namely 43dBm

Parameter name: PCPICH transmit power

Value Range: -100 to 500